DTX-MULTI 12 Owner's Manual

Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use

an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18

AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number ,the larger the current han-

dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify

any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing

units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an

audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mount-

ing ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional

accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled

or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional

ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-

mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-

tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries

of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or

incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-

ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason

its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-

ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-

chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP

(bottom)

Owner’s Manual

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Electronic Percussion Pad

Model Name : DTXM12

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth termi-

nal of the three pin plug.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be

mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national

legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health

and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the

point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the

correct method of disposal.

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget,

även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL:

Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en

stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS:

Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

• This applies only to products distributed by

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (page 110) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result

in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand/rack speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand

or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to

the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument's air vent, since this may prevent

adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the

instrument overheating.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

Connections

(3)-13

1/2

Owner’s Manual

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to external USB storage device.

Backing up the USB storage device

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two USB storage devices.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the standby position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Special Notice

• This Owner’s Manual and all content thereof is copyright of Yamaha Corporation.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer software and other content for which Yamaha retains the copyright or, with respect to which, has license to use others’ copyrights.

Such copyrighted materials include, but are not limited to, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI data, wave data, musical scores, and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of

said software and content for non-personal applications is prohibited under applicable laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DO NOT MAKE, DISTRIBUTE, OR

USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

• This device is capable of using various musical-data types and formats by optimization thereof in advance to a speciﬁc proprietary format. As a result, this instrument may not play

back said data exactly as the producers or composers thereof originally intended.

• Copying of commercially available musical data including, but not limited to, MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except when intended for personal use.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

■

Latest Firmware Version

From time to time, Yamaha may update product ﬁrmware without prior notice. We recommend, therefore, that you check our web site (below) for the latest version and

keep your DTX-MULTI 12 ﬁrmware up to date.

http://dtxdrums.yamaha.com

The content of this Owner’s Manual applies to the newest version of the ﬁrmware as of printing. Details regarding any functions added to later versions will also be made

available via the above web site.

■

Optional Pads

Within this Owner’s Manual, the optional external pads that may be connected to the DTX-MULTI 12 are referred to by model name. Please note that these model names

were up-to-date as of printing of this manual. Details regarding any subsequently released models will be made available via the following web site.

http://dtxdrums.yamaha.com

(3)-13

2/2

Owner’s Manual

Welcome

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha DTX-MULTI 12 Electronic Percussion Pad.

To get the most out of your new instrument, please read this owner’s manual carefully. And after reading this

document, be sure to store it in a safe place so that you can refer back to it again as needed.

Additional Package Contents

●

Power adaptor

●

Owner’s Manual (this document)

●

Data List booklet

●

DVD-ROM (containing software)

Features of the DTX-MULTI 12

12 built-in pads and versatile input connectors

The DTX-MULTI 12 features 12 built-in pads that have been

conveniently arranged for ease-of-use in a wide variety of per-

formance situations. On the rear panel, furthermore, you will

ﬁnd input connectors for ﬁve additional Yamaha electronic drum

pads and drum triggers. By combining separately-sold pads

and drum triggers with a central DTX-MULTI 12 unit, you can

create your own compact electronic drum kit and also integrate

acoustic drums. Furthermore, with a foot switch jack and a hi-

hat controller jack also included, you can use foot switches and

controllers to select drum kits, to simulate hi-hat playing tech-

niques, and to enhance your performances in a wide range of

other ways.

High-quality sound

In addition to a broad spectrum of voices from the top-of-the-

line DTXTREME III Drum Trigger Module, the DTX-MULTI 12

also features many newly-sampled percussion sounds and ver-

satile, ready-to-use effect sounds for a grand total of 1,277

voices. What’s more, this rich variety of sounds also includes

timpani, marimba, vibraphone, and many other chromatic per-

cussion instruments. Together with great-sounding Reverb and

Chorus effects that can be applied to entire drum kits, the DTX-

MULTI 12 also features a Variation effect unit that can be used

to enhance individual voices in many exciting ways.

Wide selection of patterns

The DTX-MULTI 12 comes complete with 128 ready-to-use

melodic and rhythmic phrases (including 3 demos) known as

patterns. You can easily start and stop patterns by simply strik-

ing pads to which they are assigned, greatly adding to the

expressiveness of your performances. In addition, you can also

record your own performances as patterns and assign them to

pads in order to conveniently add original grooves to your drum

kits.

Powerful USB expandability

Using the USB TO HOST port and a USB cable (sold sepa-

rately), the DTX-MULTI 12 can be conveniently connected to a

computer. This affords you a much greater level of efﬁciency

and speed when recording performances and carrying out

many other music-production processes using computer-based

DAW (digital audio workstation) software such as Cubase AI,

which is bundled with your DTX-MULTI 12.

A USB TO DEVICE port allows USB memory devices to be

plugged in for ﬂexible data exchange. This allows you to store

your DTX-MULTI 12 settings on such a device as standard

computer ﬁles; furthermore, you can also import WAV or AIFF

audio ﬁles from a USB memory device and assign them to indi-

vidual pads, thus adding a unique, highly personal ﬂavor to

your performances.

Versatile triggering for enhanced musical possi-

bilities

With the Stack function, each pad can produce up to four differ-

ent sounds; meanwhile, the Alternate function triggers different

sounds each time a pad is struck. In addition, you can setup

the instrument to automatically select different sounds based

on how hard or soft you strike the corresponding pad or in

response to foot-switch operation.

The DTX-MULTI 12 can also be setup to allow sounds to be

silenced when a hand is pressed down on the pad and to allow

different sounds to be produced when a hand is pressed down

on a pad as it is struck. And you are not restricted to drumsticks

alone! The DTX-MULTI 12 can be easily setup to support a rich

variety of hand playing styles.

Owner’s Manual

Contents

Additional Package Contents ........................................6

Features of the DTX-MULTI 12.....................................6

Component Names & Functions............................ 8

Setting Up .............................................................. 10

Using with Acoustic Drums .........................................10

Power supply...............................................................10

Connecting Speakers and/or Headphones .................10

Connecting to Other Audio Equipment........................10

Turning on the DTX-MULTI 12....................................11

Connecting a USB Memory Device.............................11

Connecting Other MIDI Devices..................................12

Connecting to a Computer ..........................................13

Making Music with a Computer ...................................13

Setting up Cubase Remote Control ............................15

Quick Guide

Producing Sounds with the Pads................................. 16

Listening to Patterns ..................................................... 20

Making Your Own Patterns ........................................... 21

Saving Your Data on a USB Memory Device............... 23

Importing Audio Files.................................................... 25

Reference

Internal Design ...................................................... 27

Functional Blocks ........................................................27

Pads & Trigger Signals ...............................................28

Sounds Produced Using the Pads ..............................31

Kit Makeup ..................................................................32

Effects .........................................................................36

Internal Memory ..........................................................42

Basic Operations .................................................. 44

KIT Setting Area (KIT)........................................... 46

Makeup of KIT Setting Area ........................................46

KIT1 Select Kit ............................................................47

KIT2 Kit Volume, Tempo & Name ...............................47

KIT3 Effect Send Levels..............................................48

KIT4 Variation Effect Setup.........................................48

KIT5 Chorus Effect Setup ...........................................49

KIT6 Reverb Effect Setup ...........................................50

KIT7 Other Drum Kit Settings......................................51

KIT8 Kit Management .................................................53

VOICE Setting Area

(VCE).................................... 55

Makeup of VOICE Setting Area ..................................55

VCE1 Select Voice......................................................56

VCE2 Voice Tuning, Volume & Pan............................57

VCE3 Voice Timbre.....................................................58

VCE4 Effect Send Levels............................................59

VCE5 Other Voice-Related Settings ...........................60

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI) ....................................... 61

Structure of MIDI Setting Area ....................................61

MIDI1 Select Message Type .......................................62

MIDI2 MIDI Destination Switches................................66

MIDI3 Other MIDI Settings ..........................................67

WAVE Setting Area

(WAVE) ................................ 69

Makeup of WAVE Setting Area ...................................69

WAVE1 Wave Selection & Playback...........................70

WAVE2 Playback Mode, Trim Points & Name ............70

WAVE3 Other Wave-Related Tasks ...........................71

WAVE4 Wave Memory Status ....................................73

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN) .............................. 74

Makeup of PATTERN Setting Area .............................74

PTN1 Select Pattern....................................................75

PTN2 Looping, Tempo & Pattern Names....................75

PTN3 MIDI Settings for Patterns .................................76

PTN4 Pattern Quantization & Management ................78

PTN5 Pattern Memory Status .....................................81

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)................................. 82

Makeup of UTILITY Setting Area ................................82

UTIL1 System Settings................................................83

UTIL2 Click Track Settings..........................................84

UTIL3 Master Equalization ..........................................86

UTIL4 Pad Utilities.......................................................88

UTIL5 Hi-hat Setup......................................................89

UTIL6 Instrument MIDI Setup......................................90

UTIL7 File Management..............................................92

UTIL8 Instrument Reset ..............................................98

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG) .............................. 99

Makeup of TRIGGER Setting Area .............................99

TRG1 Select Trigger Setup .......................................100

TRG2 Pad Setup .......................................................100

TRG3 Trigger Setup Names......................................104

TRG4 Copy Trigger Parameters ...............................104

Troubleshooting ................................................. 105

On-screen Messages.......................................... 108

Specifications ..................................................... 110

Index .................................................................... 111

Owner’s Manual

Component Names & Functions

■

Front Panel

VOLUME Dial

This dial controls the master volume (i.e., the volume at the

OUTPUT jacks). Turn the dial clockwise to increase the volume

or counter-clockwise to decrease it.

Display

This LCD screen shows information and data needed for oper-

ation.

Pad Indicator

This array of LEDs shows the pads that have been struck and

are currently producing a sound. The displayed numbers 1 to

12 correspond to the twelve main and rim pads on the instru-

ment itself. In addition, the lamp [13-17] turns on in response to

playing of expansion pads (sold-separately), which are con-

nected via the PAD jacks on the rear panel, or to signals from a

foot switch or hi-hat controller (sold-separately), which is con-

nected via the FOOT SW or HI-HAT CONTROL jack, also on

the rear panel.

• Before use, be sure to remove the transparent ﬁlm applied to the indi-

cator panel to protect it during transportation.

[MIDI] Button

This button is used to access the MIDI setting area (see page

61). In addition, you can turn on and off the Cubase Remote

function by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the

[MIDI] button. When this function is turned on, the buttons on

the DTX-MULTI 12 front panel can be used to control Cubase

operations (see page 15).

[VOICE] Button

This button is used to access the Voice setting area (see page

55).

[KIT] Button

This button is used to access the Kit setting area (see page

46). In addition, you can toggle effects applied to the current

drum kit on and off by holding down the [SHIFT] button and

pressing the [KIT] button (see page 83).

[PTN] Button

The Pattern button is used to access the Pattern setting area

(see page 74). In addition, you can also activate Record Mode

by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [PTN]

button (see page 21).

[WAVE] Button

This button is used to access the Wave setting area (see page

69). In addition, you can also open the Import page by holding

down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [WAVE] button (see

page 25).

[UTILITY] Button

This button is used to access the Utility setting area (see page

82). In addition, you can also access the Trigger setting area by

holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [UTILITY]

button (see page 99).

[SHIFT] Button

Hold down this button and press another button to access the

setting area or function indicated above or below it.

[EE

] Button

The Click-track button is used to start and stop the built-in click-

track (or metronome). In addition, you can also activate the Tap

Tempo function by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing

the [ ] button.

[EXIT] Button

The parameter-setting pages in each setting area are arranged

in a hierarchical structure. Press this button to leave the current

page and move one step back towards the top of the setting

area. In addition, you can instantly turn off all sound by holding

down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [EXIT] button.

[ENTER] Button

This button is used to execute processes and conﬁrm values. In

addition, you can activate the Panel Lock function to lock and

unlock the front panel by holding down the [SHIFT] button and

pressing the [ENTER] button. In this way, the front panel can be

deactivated during performances in order to avoid making unin-

tentional changes to settings. Even with the Panel Lock acti-

vated, the [KIT] and [VOICE] buttons can be used to access the

corresponding setting areas; however, you will only be able to

change the current kit using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons or

visually conﬁrm the voice assigned to struck pads. To check

voices with the Panel Lock activated, press the [VOICE] button.

[STORE] Button

This button is used to store settings and other data in the DTX-

MULTI 12’s internal memory. In addition, this button will light up

whenever parameters have been changed but not yet stored.

!5 [B] [D] [C] Buttons

• These selector buttons are used to navigate between param-

eter-setting pages and parameters in the various setting

areas.

•You can activate and deactivate Input Lock mode by holding

down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [D] button (see

page 103).

•With a parameter-setting page displayed, you can move to the

ﬁrst parameter-setting page of the previous or next parameter

section in the current setting area by holding down the

[SHIFT] button and pressing the [B] or [C] button.

≤≤≤≤≤YAMAHA

<<DTX-MULTI≤12>>

e !5

o !0 !4 !6 !7iuy

r !1 !2 !3tqw

NOTE

Component Names & Functions

Owner’s Manual 9

!6 [-/DEC] Button

This button is used when setting parameters to decrease the

value at the cursor position. In addition, the selected value can

be decreased in units of 10 by holding down the [SHIFT] button

and pressing the [-/DEC] button or by holding down the [-/DEC]

button and pressing the [+/INC] button.

!7 [+/INC] Button

This button is used when setting parameters to increase the

value at the cursor position. In addition, the selected value can

be increased in units of 10 by holding down the [SHIFT] button

and pressing the [+/INC] button or by holding down the [+/INC]

button and pressing the [-/DEC] button.

■ Side Panel

■ Rear Panel

@0 Standby/On Switch

Use this switch to turn your DTX-MULTI 12 on ( ) and off

().

@1 Cord Clip

Wrap the cord from the power adaptor around this clip to pre-

vent accidental unplugging during use.

@2 DC IN Terminal

Connect the power cord from the power adaptor (provided) to

this terminal.

@3 MIDI IN/OUT Connectors

The MIDI IN connector is used to receive control or perfor-

mance data from another MIDI device, such as an external

sequencer, via a MIDI cable. When connected in this way, you

can play the internal tone generator and control a wide range of

parameters using another MIDI device. Meanwhile, the MIDI

OUT connector is used to send performance data from this

instrument to other devices in the form of MIDI messages.

@4 FOOT SW Jack

The Foot Switch jack is used to connect an optional foot switch

(FC4, FC5, FC7, etc.) or hi-hat controller (HH65, etc.) to the

DTX-MULTI 12.

@5 HI-HAT CONTROL Jack

The Hi-hat Control jack is used to connect an optional hi-hat

controller (HH65, etc.).

@6 PAD Jacks (!3 to !7)

These trigger-input jacks are used to connect optional pads.

The PAD !3 jack is compatible both with mono and stereo (two-

and three-zone) types; meanwhile, the PAD !4/!5 and the PAD

!6/!7 jacks support standard mono-output pads (see page 30).

@7 AUX IN Jack

External audio signals can be input via this standard stereo-

phone plug. In this way, you can connect an MP3 or CD player

to play along with your favorite tunes.

@8 GAIN Knob

Use this knob to adjust the gain level for audio being input via

the AUX IN jack. This adjustment may be necessary given that

external audio devices output signals at a wide range of differ-

ent volumes. Increase the gain by rotating the knob clockwise,

and decrease it by rotating the knob counter-clockwise.

@9 OUTPUT L/MONO and R Jacks

Use these jacks to output line-level stereo mixes. For example,

you can connect each of the jacks to the left and right inputs of

an external stereo ampliﬁer or mixer using mono audio-jack

cables. For mono output, use the L/MONO jack only.

#0 PHONES Jack

Use this standard audio jack to connect a pair of stereo head-

phones.

#1 VOLUME Knob

Use this knob to adjust the level of audio output from the

PHONES jack. Increase the volume by rotating the knob clock-

wise, and decrease it by rotating the knob counter-clockwise.

!8 !9

USB TO DEVICE Port

This port is used to plug in a USB memory device (such as a ﬂash drive or external

hard disk), either directly or via a USB cable. When connected in this way, you will be

able to save data created on the DTX-MULTI 12 to the USB memory device and to

import settings, sound ﬁles, and the like.

!9 USB TO HOST Port

This port is used to connect the DTX-MULTI 12 to a computer via a USB cable. When

connected in this way, you will be able to exchange MIDI data between the instrument

and your computer.

@3 @9@6@4@0 @5 @7 @8 #0 #1@1 @2

10 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Using with Acoustic Drums

If you intend to use your DTX-MULTI 12 together with a set of

acoustic drums, you can attach an MAT1 Module Attachment

(sold separately) to the bottom of the unit so that it can be conve-

niently assembled to a tom holder or a stand. For details regarding

assembly, refer to the owner’s manual that comes with the MAT1.

Power supply

Ensure that the (Standby/On) switch on the

rear panel is turned off.

Connect the DC power cord from the power adap-

tor (included) to the DC IN terminal on the rear

panel. To prevent the cord from being acciden-

tally unplugged, wrap it around the cord clip.

Plug the adaptor’s AC power cord into an AC wall

socket or another electrical outlet.

Connecting Speakers and/or Head-

phones

The DTX-MULTI 12 has no built-in speakers. In order to hear it,

therefore, you will need to connect headphones or an external

ampliﬁer and speakers. (See the connection diagram below.)

● OUTPUT L/MONO and R Jacks

(standard mono audio jacks)

Use these jacks to connect your instrument to an external ampli-

ﬁer and speakers in order to hear yourself play. If the ampliﬁer

has only a single input jack, be sure to connect it via the OUTPUT

L/MONO jack.

● PHONES Jack (standard stereo audio jack)

Use this audio jack to connect a pair of stereo headphones. The

headphone volume can be adjusted using the VOLUME knob on

the rear panel.

Connecting to Other Audio Equipment

Audio input from an MP3 or CD player via the AUX IN jack can

be mixed with the sound produced by the DTX-MULTI 12 and

output together from the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) and

PHONES jacks. This makes it very easy to play along with your

favorite tunes. If necessary, furthermore, you can adjust the input

volume using the GAIN knob.

• Ensure that the power cord is not bent at an extreme angle

when wrapped around the clip. Excessive bending can dam-

age the cord and create a ﬁre hazard.

• Use only the power adaptor provided. Operation with other

adaptors may damage the instrument, cause it to overheat, or

create a ﬁre hazard.

• Ensure that the power supply is correct for the power adaptor

provided.

• The DTX-MULTI 12 remains charged and draws a small

amount of power even when the (Standby/On) switch is in

the Off position. If it is not to be used for an extended period of

time, therefore, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from

the power supply.

CAUTION

WARNING

• Whenever making connections, ensure that the plugs on the cables

being used match the DTX-MULTI 12’s output jacks.

•To prevent hearing loss, avoid using headphones at high volumes

for extended periods of time.

CAUTION

DTX-MULTI 12

Headphones

MS100DRJ or MS50DRJ Electronic

Drum Kit Monitor System, etc.

PHONES jackOUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks

AUX IN

Portable music player, etc.

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Turning on the DTX-MULTI 12

After you have connected speakers, an audio

player, and any other necessary equipment, turn

the volume of the DTX-MULTI 12 itself and the

other devices fully down as a precaution.

Press the (Standby/On) switch on the DTX-

MULTI 12’s rear panel to turn it on.

The opening screen will be displayed, followed by the Select

Kit page (from the KIT setting area).

■

Connecting a mixer or other MIDI

devices

Ensure that the volume on all devices is turned fully down. Then,

turn on the devices one-by-one in the following sequence:

MIDI controllers (master devices),

MIDI receivers (slave

devices),

audio equipment (mixers, ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.).

• When turning off your system, ﬁrst turn the volume of each audio device

fully down, and then switch off the devices one-by-one in the reverse order

to above (i.e., starting with the audio equipment).

Connecting a USB Memory Device

You can plug a USB memory device into the USB TO DEVICE

port on the side panel of your DTX-MULTI 12.

■

Precautions When Using USB TO

DEVICE Port

Whenever connecting a USB device via the USB TO DEVICE

port, be sure to handle it with care and to observe the following

important precautions.

•For more details on how to use your USB device, refer to the owner’s man-

ual that came with it.

●

Supported USB devices

Flash drives, external hard disks, and other USB-compatible,

mass-storage devices may be plugged in for use with this instru-

ment.

The DTX-MULTI 12 does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB memory devices, and Yamaha cannot guar-

antee the operation of all such devices that can be purchased.

Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument,

therefore, please check with your Yamaha dealer or an authorized

Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) or visit

the following web page:

http://dtxdrums.yamaha.com

• Other USB devices, such as a computer keyboard or mouse, cannot be

used.

●

Connecting a USB memory device

Before plugging in a USB memory device, ensure that its connec-

tor matches the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE port and that both

are oriented in the same direction.

This port supports the USB 1.1 standard; however, you can also

plug in and use USB 2.0 memory devices. It should be noted that

data will be transferred at the USB 1.1 speed in such a case.

■

Using a USB Memory Device

With a USB memory device plugged in, you will be able to save

data that you have created and to import both settings and audio

data.

• Although USB-type CD-R and CD-RW drives can be used to load data into

the instrument, they cannot be used to save data directly. You can, how-

ever, transfer data to a computer featuring a CD-R or CD-RW drive in order

to write it to this type of media.

●

Formatting USB Memory Devices

Certain types of USB memory device must be formatted before

they can be used with this instrument. For details on how to do

this, see page 97.

≥≥≥≥≥YAMAHA

<<DTX-MULTI≥12>>

NOTE

DTX-MULTI 12

Connection to USB

memory device

(hard disk, etc.)

USB memory

device

• When a USB memory device is formatted, all data stored on it will

be permanently erased. Before formatting such a device, therefore,

ensure that any important data contained on it has been copied to

another location.

NOTE

CAUTION

Setting Up

12 Owner’s Manual

● Write Protection

Certain types of USB memory device can be write-protected to

prevent data from being accidentally erased. If your USB memory

device contains important data, we suggest that you use write pro-

tection to prevent accidental erasure. Meanwhile, if you need to

save data on such a device, be sure to disable the write-protect

function.

Connecting Other MIDI Devices

Using standard MIDI cables (sold separately), you can connect

other MIDI devices via the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT connectors.

When connected in this way, the DTX-MULTI 12 can be used to

control synthesizers and other sound modules. Meanwhile, the

instrument’s internal tone generator can be played using other

connected MIDI devices. These and many other MIDI functions

allow for an even greater range of performance and recording pos-

sibilities.

• In addition to the two built-in MIDI connectors, the USB TO HOST port can

also be used to exchange MIDI data. Selection of whether to use the MIDI

connectors or the USB TO HOST port for this purpose is performed on the

MIDI In/Out page from the MIDI section of the UTILITY setting area (see

page 91).

■ To Control a Sound Module or Synthe-

sizer

Using a MIDI cable, connect the MIDI OUT connector on the

DTX-MULTI 12 to the MIDI IN connector on the device you

want to control or play.

■ To Control the DTX-MULTI 12 from

Another MIDI Device

Using a MIDI cable, connect the MIDI IN connector on the DTX-

MULTI 12 to the MIDI OUT connector on the controller device.

● Synchronizing with Other MIDI Devices

(Master and slave devices)

The playback of patterns on the DTX-MULTI 12 can be synchro-

nized with playback on an external MIDI device. This instrument

and other MIDI devices use an internal clock to control the tempo

of playback, and when two such devices are synchronized, it is

necessary to specify which clock will be used by both. The device

set to use its own internal clock serves as a reference for all con-

nected devices and is referred to as the “master” instrument. Con-

nected devices set to use an external clock are referred to as

“slaves”. For example, if devices were connected as shown above

and you wanted to record playback data from the external MIDI

device as a pattern on the DTX-MULTI 12, it would be necessary

to set the external MIDI device as the master; furthermore, the

DTX-MULTI 12 would need to be setup to use an external clock

for synchronization. To do so, ﬁrst of all press the [UTILITY] but-

ton to access the UTILITY setting area, navigate to the MIDI sec-

tion (UTIL6) using the [B]/[C] buttons, and press the [ENTER]

button. Next, navigate to the MIDI Sync page (UTIL6-6) using

the [B]/[C] buttons, and set the MIDI Sync parameter to either

“ext” or “auto”.

• The MIDI Sync parameter is set to “auto” by default.

• If using a self-powered type of USB memory device, avoid turning it

on and off repeatedly. In addition, avoid frequent plugging and

unplugging of USB cables. If this precaution is not observed, the

DTX-MULTI 12 may freeze and stop operating.

•Never turn off either a plugged-in USB memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 or unplug the memory device while it is being accessed

within the UTILITY setting area in order to save, load, or delete

data or to perform formatting. If this precaution is not observed,

data on the USB memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12 may be cor-

rupted.

CAUTION

NOTE

MIDI cable

External MIDI device

DTX-MULTI 12

MIDI IN

connector

MIDI OUT

connector

DTX-MULTI 12

MIDI IN

connector

MIDI cable

MIDI OUT

connector

External MIDI device

UTIL6-6≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥MIDI≥Sync=ext

auto

NOTE

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual 13

Connecting to a Computer

Although the DTX-MULTI 12 is exceptionally powerful and ver-

satile all by itself, connecting it to a computer via USB allows for

even greater power and versatility. When connected in this way,

MIDI data can be freely transferred between the instrument and

the computer. In this section, you’ll learn how to make the neces-

sary connections.

• As the DTX-MULTI 12 has no built-in speakers, you will need to connect

headphones or an external ampliﬁer and speakers in order to hear it. For

details, see page 10.

•A USB cable is not included. In order to connect to a computer, use a USB

A-B cable of no more than 3 meters in length.

Download the latest version of the USB-MIDI

driver to your computer from the following web

page. After clicking the Download button, save

the compressed ﬁle in a convenient location and

then expand it.

http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/usb_midi/

• Information on system requirements is also provided on the above web

page.

• The USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice.

Before installing, visit the above web page to conﬁrm the latest related

information and ensure that you have the most up-to-date version.

Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer.

For instructions on installing, refer to the guide included with

the driver installer. When the guide indicates that your

Yamaha product should be connected to the computer, do so

as shown below.

To enable the exchange of MIDI data via the USB

TO HOST port, press the [UTILITY] button to

access the UTILITY setting area and then navi-

gate to the MIDI In/Out page (UTIL6-9).

Set the MIDI IN/OUT parameter to “USB” (using

the [+/INC] button if necessary).

Press the [STORE] button and store this setting.

■ Precautions When Using USB TO HOST

Port

When connecting to a computer via the USB TO HOST port, be

sure to observe the precautions listed below. Failing to do so risks

freezing your computer and corrupting or losing data. If your

computer or DTX-MULTI 12 should freeze, restart the applica-

tion being used, reboot the computer, or turn the instrument off

once and then back on.

Making Music with a Computer

■ Recording DTX-MULTI 12 Performance

Data using a DAW Application

The following section will describe how to record your perfor-

mances using a DAW application running on a connected com-

puter.

Normally, when playing in order to record on a computer, perfor-

mance data produced by striking the pads is ﬁrst sent to the com-

puter and then returned to the instrument in order to play its

internal tone generator. If local control of the DTX-MULTI 12 is

turned on (via the Local Control page (UTIL6-5) from the UTIL-

ITY area), performance data will also be sent directly to the tone

generator, and as a result, the direct and returned data will over-

lap, making it sound as if the pads are being struck twice.

NOTE

DTX-MULTI 12

USB cable

USB port

USB TO HOST port

Computer

UTIL6-9≥≥≥<MIDI>

MIDI≥IN/OUT=MIDI

UTIL6-9≥≥≥<MIDI>

MIDI≥IN/OUT=USB

• Use a USB A-B cable of no more than 3 meters in length.

• Before connecting to the computer via the USB TO HOST port,

restore the computer from any power-saving mode (such as Sus-

pend, Sleep, or Standby).

• Connect the computer via the USB TO HOST port before turning

on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• Be sure to always perform the following steps before turning the

instrument on or off and either plugging or unplugging the USB

cable.

• Quit all applications.

• Ensure that no data is being sent from the DTX-MULTI 12. (Data

is transmitted by striking the pads or playing patterns.)

• When connected to a computer, allow at least 6 seconds to pass

between turning the instrument on and off and plugging or unplug-

ging the USB cable.

CAUTION

Within DTX-MULTI 12

Internal tone

generator

Off

Sound is produced

Local Control Settings

No sound is

produced.

Setting Up

14 Owner’s Manual

Most DAW applications allow MIDI Thru to be turned on, and

therefore, you can setup your system as shown below with local

control of the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off and the DAW applica-

tion returning performance data to the tone generator. In this way,

performances can be recorded in comfort without each strike

being heard twice.

•DAW is an abbreviation of digital audio workstation. DAW applications such

as Cubase can be used to record, edit, and mix audio and MIDI data on a

computer.

We will now describe how to setup parameters for recording your

performances, ﬁrst on the instrument itself, and then within the

DAW application.

● DTX-MULTI 12 settings

Turn off local control as follows.

Press the [UTILITY] button to access the UTILITY

setting area, navigate to the MIDI section (UTIL6)

using the [BB

]/[CC

] buttons, and press the

[ENTER] button.

Navigate to the Local Control page (UTIL6-5)

using the [BB

]/[CC

] buttons.

Set the LocalCtrl parameter to “off” (using the [-/

DEC] button if necessary).

Press the [STORE] button and store this setting.

With local control turned off in this way, performance data pro-

duced by striking the pads will not be sent to the internal tone

generator.

● Setting DAW-Application Parameters

Within your DAW application, turn on MIDI Thru. This setting

ensures that, when performance data is being recorded on a track

within your application, it is also returned to the external MIDI

system.

For example, let’s assume that performance data is being recorded

on Track 3 by your DAW application. In addition, we’ll also

assume that MIDI Channel 1 has been set for the return of perfor-

mance data. If MIDI Thru is now turned on for Track 3, the DAW

application will return the performance data to the DTX-MULTI

12 as it is being recorded, and the instrument’s internal tone gen-

erator will sound as if it is being played directly (on Channel 1).

•For details on how to turn on MIDI Thru, refer to the manual that came with

your DAW application.

• If local control on the DTX-MULTI 12 and MIDI Thru within your DAW appli-

cation are both turned off, no performance data will be sent to the internal

tone generator, either directly or indirectly. As a result, no sound will be pro-

duced.

■ Playing the DTX-MULTI 12 using MIDI

Data from a DAW Application

As described below, you can setup the DTX-MULTI 12 to operate

as a multi-timbral tone generator for your DAW application. In

this way, you can easily integrate the instrument’s high-quality

MIDI tone generator into your music-production setup. For

details on how to connect the DTX-MULTI 12 to your computer,

see page 13.

Set each of the tracks within your DAW applica-

tion to output their MIDI data to the DTX-MULTI

12.

Play MIDI performance data using the DAW appli-

cation.

DTX-MULTI 12

USB TO HOST port

MIDI Thru turned

on within DAW

application.

Computer

OUT

OUTIN

Local control

LocalCtrl =“off”

Pads

Internal

tone

generator

NOTE

UTIL6

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

UTIL6-5≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥LocalCtrl=on

UTIL6-5≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥LocalCtrl=off

NOTE

Setting Up

Owner’s Manual

Setting up Cubase Remote Control

Using a special feature, the DTX-MULTI 12 can operate as a

remote controller for Cubase. For example, you can operate the

Cubase transport, turn its metronome on or off, and control vari-

ous other functions from the instrument’s front panel, signiﬁ-

cantly increasing the efﬁciency of your music production

workﬂow.

■

Computer settings

When setting up Cubase remote control for the ﬁrst time, com-

plete the following steps to conﬁgure your computer correctly.

Download the latest version of the DTX-MULTI 12

Extension from the following web page.

Save the compressed ﬁle in a convenient location and then

expand it.

http://dtxdrums.yamaha.com

• Ensure that the latest USB MIDI driver is installed on your computer

(see page 13).

• Information on system requirements is also provided on the above web

page.

• The DTX-MULTI 12 Extension may be revised and updated without

prior notice. Before installing, visit the above web page to conﬁrm the

latest related information and ensure that you have the most up-to-

date version.

Execute the expanded DTX-MULTI 12 Extension

to carry out the required installation procedure.

For more details, refer to the owner’s manual

included in the downloaded package.

■

DTX-MULTI 12 settings

Whenever the Cubase Remote function is to be used, the follow-

ing steps must be completed on the DTX-MULTI 12.

Within the UTILITY setting area, navigate to the

MIDI In/Out page (UTIL6-9) and set MIDI IN/OUT to

“USB”.

Ensure that the DTX-MULTI 12 is connected to

your computer in the correct manner, and then

launch Cubase.

For more details regarding connection, see page 13.

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the

[MIDI] button.

The message “Cubase Remote” will be displayed to conﬁrm

that the function has been activated.

• When Cubase Remote mode has been activated, those front-panel

buttons that can be used will light up.

To deactivate Cubase Remote mode, again hold

down the [SHIFT] button and press the [MIDI] but-

ton.

■

Button Functions in Cubase Remote

Mode

•For more details regarding the operation of Cubase Remote mode, refer to

the owner’s manual included in the downloaded package.

NOTE

UTIL6-9≥≥≥<MIDI>

MIDI≥IN/OUT=USB

Button Operation

[SHIFT] + [MIDI] Turns the Cubase Remote function on and off.

[KIT] Opens the VSTi window.

[PTN] Starts and stops playback.

[SHIFT] + [PTN] Starts recording.

[-/DEC], [+/INC] Increases or decreases a preset by 1.

[

]Rewinds the transport (REW).

[

]Fast forwards the transport (FF).

[

]

Returns the transport to the start of the song

(TOP).

Tur ns the click track on and off.

<<≥≥≥Cubase≥≥≥>>

<<≥≥≥Remote≥≥≥>>

NOTE

16 Owner’s Manual

Producing Sounds with the Pads

In order that you can start having fun with your DTX-MULTI 12 as soon as possible, this section will begin by

explaining the basic way in which the pads can be played using drum sticks (sold separately), and following

that, will show how to select various kits (i.e., sets of pad sounds).

Pad Names

As shown below, numbers 1 through 12 are assigned to the built-

in pads. These numbers are also shown at the corresponding

positions within the Pad Indicator, and they will light up when

the associated pad is struck.

Striking the Pads

When playing Pads 4 to 9 (i.e., the main pads), aim to strike the

center of the pad with the tip of the drum stick.

Meanwhile, when playing Pads 1 to 3 and Pads 10 to 12 (i.e., the

rim pads), aim to strike the center of the pad with the shoulder of

the drum stick.

• Do not place your ﬁngers into the gaps between Pads 1 to 3 and

the instrument's plastic body. If this precaution is not observed,

your ﬁngers may be injured as a result of crushing or squeezing.

123

456

789

10 11 12

Pad Indicator

CAUTION

Tip

Area of drumstick to use

● Playing Pads 4 to 9

Shoulder

Area of drumstick to use

● Playing Pads 1 to 3 and Pads 10 to 12

Producing Sounds with the Pads

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual 17

You can also adjust the sensitivity of the pads to allow them to be

played by hand (see page 19).

•Drum and other individual instrument sounds known collectively as preset

voices and rhythmic or musical phrases known as patterns can be

assigned to each of the pads. Whenever you strike a pad to which a pat-

tern has been assigned, the pattern will either be played through just once

(one-shot) or repeated (loop), and the corresponding lamp within the Pad

Indicator will light up. If a pad playing a looped pattern is struck again, the

pattern will stop playing and the lamp will go out.

• If looping patterns are assigned to multiple pads and you loose track of

which ones are actually being played, you can silence all sound output by

holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [EXIT] button.

• If a pad is struck too lightly or very close to an edge or corner, the corre-

sponding lamp in the Pad Indicator may not turn on.

■ Muting

Muting is the action of placing a hand on a struck percussion

instrument in order to silence it, and the DTX-MULTI 12 pads

support this playing technique. In addition, when multiple

sounds have been assigned to a pad, you can use also muting to

switch between these sounds for more expressive performances.

•For details on how to switch sounds by muting, see page 51.

Selecting a Preset Kit

The term “kit” is used to refer to a collection of sounds (i.e., pre-

set voices, waves, and patterns) produced when you strike each

of the pads, and the DTX-MULTI 12 comes complete with an

impressive range of specially-prepared preset kits. Using the pro-

cedure outlined below, select various kits and enjoy some of the

stunning sounds that your instrument can produce.

• The screen displays shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional

purposes only, and they may appear somewhat different from those on

your DTX-MULTI 12.

Press the [KIT] button to open the Select

Kit page.

The [KIT] button will light up.

Use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons to

select a new drum kit.

Try playing the each of the pads from various differ-

ent types of kit.

•A number of the Preset kits have been specially setup for

playing by hand. When you select one of them, a hand icon

will be displayed on-screen as shown below.

• Kits having a number preceded by the letter “U” are User kits

(i.e., user-deﬁned kits). With these kits, you can create and

save your own collections of preset voices, patterns, and

waves.

NOTE

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

NOTE

KIT1≥≥≥≥≥≥≥ˇÁ

P001:PercsMaster

● Kit suitable for playing by hand

KIT1

U001:User≥Kit

● User-deﬁned kit

Starts with “U”

18 Owner’s Manual

Producing Sounds with the Pads

Assigning Preset Voices to Pads

In the following simple example, we will create a User kit by

replacing one of the sounds assigned to the pads in a Preset kit.

Speciﬁcally, we will assign a voice to Pad 4 from the selected kit,

and we will then save the resultant kit to the empty User kit

U001.

Press the [KIT] button to open the Select

Kit page.

Use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons to

select a kit to work with.

Press the [VOICE] button to open the

Select Voice page.

Strike Pad 4 to select it and to change the

displayed pad number to .

Alternatively, you can move the ﬂashing cursor to the

pad number, and then change it from to

using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons.

Select the voice you want to assign to Pad

Move the ﬂashing cursor to the leftmost parameter

from the lower row of text, and using the [-/DEC] and

[+/INC] buttons, select the voice category and voice

number of the voice you wish to assign.

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

KIT1

P009:Oak≥Custom

VCE01≥≥-º¡-≥≥≥

Cy013:Thin16Eg

-º¢-

-º¡-

-º¢-

VCE01≥≥-º¢-≥≥≥

Tm001:OakCtm≥H

Pad number

VCE01≥≥-º¢-≥≥≥

Sn004:MapleCtm

Voice nameVoice number

Voice category

Voice Categories

Similar voices are grouped together in voice

categories. In addition to melodic instruments

such as timpani and marimba, you can also

select voice categories containing Preset pat-

terns, User patterns, and waves. For more

information, refer to the Data List booklet.

Producing Sounds with the Pads

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual 19

Press the [STORE] button and store the

edited kit as a User kit.

As shown here, select the empty User kit U001, using

the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons if necessary, and

then press the [ENTER] button.

• The [STORE] button will light up whenever settings have

been changed but not yet stored in the DTX-MULTI 12’s inter-

nal memory. The button will, therefore, go out when the modi-

ﬁed settings are stored.

When asked to conﬁrm that you want to

store the kit, press the [ENTER] button to

proceed.

With User pad U001 selected, strike Pad 4

to hear the voice that you assigned.

■ Layers

Using the Layer function, you can assign a number of different

voices to a single pad or external controller. Up to four layers (A

to D) to be setup per pad, meaning that each pad can play as

many as four different voices. Furthermore, a number of different

playback modes can be employed for voices assigned to layers.

For example, these voices can be triggered simultaneously, a dif-

ferent one can be played each time the pad is struck, or they can

alternate between on and off upon successive hits. Details on lay-

ers can be found on page 32.

■ Playing by hand

The DTX-MULTI 12 features a number of different preset kits

suitable for hand percussion – that is, for playing with hands

instead of drum sticks. As described below, furthermore, you can

use a trigger setup at any time to adjust the sensitivity of the pads

to suit playing by hand.

● Setting pad sensitivity for playing by hand

q Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [UTILITY] but-

ton to access the Trigger setting area. The Select Trigger

Setup page will be displayed.

w Use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons to select the “P04:

Hand” or “P05: Finger” trigger setup.

• Whenever you select a hand-percussion preset kit, the pad sensitivity (i.e.,

the trigger setup) will automatically change to suit playing by hand.

•Very high levels of pad sensitivity are more likely to result in a phenome-

non known as crosstalk, where pads other than the one struck trigger

sounds due to vibration or interference between pads.

•For details on how to conﬁgure trigger setups in the Trigger setting area,

see page 99.

• The message ”Please keep power on...” will be dis-

played while data is being stored. It is very important

that the DTX-MULTI 12 is not turned off until this

message disappears. If the instrument were to be

turned off at this time, data for all User kits could be

permanently lost.

VCE≥Store≥to

U001:User≥Kit

User kit number User kit name

NOTE

≥≥≥KIT≥Store

≥Are≥you≥sure?≥≥

CAUTION

≥≥Please≥keep

≥≥power≥on...

TRG1≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

P01:Stick≥Wide≥≥

TRG1≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

P04:Hand

NOTE

20 Owner’s Manual

Listening to Patterns

Your DTX-MULTI 12 has been pre-loaded with a rich variety of melodic and rhythmic phrases in the form of Pre-

set patterns. The ﬁrst three Preset patterns (eP001 to eP003) have been specially setup to demonstrate the rich

spectrum of sounds that your DTX-MULTI 12 can produce. Patterns numbered eP004 and higher can be freely

assigned to pads for use in your own User drum kits.

Listening to Demo Patterns

Press the [PTN] button to open the Select

Pattern page.

The [PTN] button will light up. Demo patterns are

numbered eP001 to eP003.

Press the [PTN] button once again to start

playback of a demo pattern.

The [PTN] button will ﬂash while the demo pattern is

being played, and the name of the pattern will be dis-

played inside “<<” and “>>” characters on the upper

row of text. Furthermore, the lower row of text will

shown the name of the kit being used for playback of

the demo pattern.

To stop the demo pattern, press any button

other than [SHIFT].

Listening to Preset Patterns

Press the [PTN] button to open the Select

Pattern page.

Select the Preset pattern you want to listen

to using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons.

Select a Preset pattern numbered eP004 or higher.

Press the [PTN] button once again to start

playback of the selected Preset pattern.

The [PTN] button will ﬂash while the Preset pattern is

being played.

To stop the pattern, press the [PTN] button

on the Select Pattern page (PTN1).

• If you wish to assign a Preset pattern to a pad, follow the pro-

cedure described on page 18, and at Step 5, select the Pre-

set pattern instead of a preset voice.

PTN1≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

©P001:Demo≥01

≥<<Demo≥01>>

P039:Orchestra

PTN1≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

©P004:80s≥Electo

NOTE

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual 21

Making Your Own Patterns

Using the DTX-MULTI 12, you can also create User patterns by recording your own performances. And in the

same way as Preset patterns, these User patterns can then be freely assigned to pads and played back.

Recording Your Performance as a

Pattern

Following the steps below, let’s create a User pattern by record-

ing a performance and then assign that pattern to Pad 6.

Press the [PTN] button to access the Pat-

tern setting area, and select an empty User

pattern using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] but-

tons.

Empty User patterns are named “Empty Ptn”.

• If you select a User pattern already containing data for

recording, you can add additional performance data to that

pattern as you record.

•Two existing patterns can be merged to create a new User

pattern (see page 79).

Press the [KIT] button to open the Select

Kit page, and using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons, select the drum kit you want to

use for recording your pattern.

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press

the [PTN] button to activate Record Mode.

The [PTN] button will turn red.

• If a Preset pattern is selected when you activate Record

Mode, your performance will be recorded to an empty User

pattern.

Set the required recording conditions.

On the Record Mode screen (REC), you can set the

tempo and time signature of the click track to be

played when recording, the length of the pattern in

measures (or bars), and a number of other important

parameters. Move the ﬂashing cursor to the required

parameter using the [B], [D], and [C] buttons, and

change the setting using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] but-

tons.

• If you select a User pattern already containing data,

your performance will be added to that data as a

result of recording. If you want to avoid this, be sure

to select an empty User pattern for recording.

PTN1≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

©U003:Empty≥Ptn

Pattern name

CAUTION

NOTE

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

REC≥≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

Meas=004≥Q=©≥≥-“

NOTE

REC≥≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

Meas=004≥Q=©≥≥-“

t Playback modee Length

r Quantize

q Tempo w Time signature

q Tempo: The speed of the pattern in beats

per second.

w Time signature: The time signature of the

pattern to be recorded.

e Length: The length of the pattern in mea-

sures.

r Quantize: The precision of timing correc-

tion for the recorded pattern.

t Playback mode: The type of pattern to be

recorded – i.e., one-shot or loop.

22 Owner’s Manual

Making Your Own Patterns

Press the [PTN] button to start recording.

The DTX-MULTI 12 will count you in over two mea-

sures. Then, play the pattern you want to record in

time with the click track.

Recording will end automatically after the

number of measures set as the pattern

length in Step 4 above.

The message ”Please keep power on...” will be dis-

played for a short period of time as data is being

stored.

• Recording can be stopped at any time by pressing the [PTN]

button. All performance data recorded up to that point will be

stored.

• If looped playback was selected in Step 4 above, recording

can be ended by pressing the [PTN] button.

When the Pad Assign page is displayed,

strike Pad 6 to display pad number ,

and then press the [ENTER] button.

Alternatively, you can use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons to select on this page.

• If you set PadAssign to “off”, the recorded pattern will not be

assigned to any pad.

• Although you can freely assign the recorded pattern to a pad

at any time, it is best to use a pad from the drum kit selected

in Step 1 above. If you assign it to a pad from another kit, the

pattern may not play as recorded.

Press the [KIT] button to access the KIT

setting area.

Press the [STORE] button and store the

current kit and its new pattern assignment

as a User kit.

As shown here, select an empty User kit using the [-/

DEC] and [+/INC] buttons, and then press the

[ENTER] button.

When asked to conﬁrm that you want to

store the kit, press the [ENTER] button to

proceed.

With the stored drum kit selected, strike

Pad 6 to hear the pattern that you

assigned.

• Up to 50 User patterns can be recorded on your DTX-MULTI

12. If an attempt is made to record more than this number,

the message “Seq data is not empty” will be displayed and

the recording process will end. In such a case, delete

unneeded User patterns (see page 79) and begin recording

again.

•Turning off the DTX-MULTI 12 while recording can

result in data for all User patterns being lost and

must, therefore, be avoided.

•Turning off the DTX-MULTI 12 while the message

”Please keep power on...” is being displayed can

result in all User-pattern data being lost and must,

therefore, be avoided.

REC≥Meas=≥001

Now≥Recording...

Measure currently being recorded

CAUTION

≥Please≥keep≥≥≥

≥power≥on...

CAUTION

NOTE

º§

REC

≥PadAssign=º§

Pad number

NOTE

• The message ”Please keep power on...” will be dis-

played while data is being stored. It is very important

that the DTX-MULTI 12 is not turned off until this

message disappears. If the instrument were to be

turned off at this time, data for all User kits could be

permanently lost.

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

VCE≥Store≥to

U001:User≥Kit

User kit number User kit name

≥≥≥KIT≥Store

≥Are≥you≥sure?≥≥

CAUTION

≥≥Please≥keep

≥≥power≥on...

NOTE

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual 23

Plug a USB memory device into the USB

TO DEVICE port on the side panel.

•For more details regarding USB memory devices, see the

section Connecting a USB Memory Device on page 11.

Press the [UTILITY] button to access the

UTILITY setting area, use the [

]/[CC

] but-

tons to navigate to the FILE section

(UTIL7), and then press the [ENTER] but-

ton.

Navigate to the Save File page (UTIL7-1),

using the [

]/[CC

] buttons if necessary,

and then press the [ENTER] button.

Set Type to “All”, using the [-/DEC] and [+/

INC] buttons if necessary.

When you have made this setting, press the [ENTER]

button.

•For details on saving data with a Type setting other than “All”,

see page 93.

Enter a name for the ﬁle to be saved.

For more details on how to input characters and the

types of character that can be used for ﬁle names, see-

see page 47.

• File names can be up to eight characters in length.

When you have entered the required name,

press the [ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that you want to save the

ﬁle, and the [ENTER] button will ﬂash on and off.

NOTE

UTIL7

≥≥≥≥≥≥FILE

UTIL7-1

≥≥≥Save≥File

UTIL7-1-1

Type=All

NOTE

UTIL7-1-2

Name[≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥]

NOTE

≥≥≥Save≥File

≥Are≥you≥sure?

Saving Your Data on a USB Memory Device

Data that you have made, such as User kits and User patterns, can be conveniently saved as combined ﬁles on

a USB memory device. In the following example, we will create a single ﬁle containing all of the data created or

modiﬁed in the various DTX-MULTI 12 setting areas on a such a device.

24 Owner’s Manual

Saving Your Data on a USB Memory Device

To proceed, press the [ENTER] button one

more time.

If a ﬁle with the same name already exists on the USB

memory device, you will be asked to conﬁrm whether

you want to overwrite it. If that ﬁle is no longer

needed and can be overwritten, press the [ENTER]

button. Alternatively, if the older ﬁle contains impor-

tant data, press the [EXIT] button to return to the

Name page and repeat the procedure from Step 5

above using a different ﬁle name.

The message “Now saving... [EXIT] to cancel” will

be displayed while your data is being saved. The mes-

sage “Completed.” will then be displayed when the

data has been saved, and the display will return to the

Save File page (UTIL7-1) from Step 4 above.

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB

TO DEVICE port or turn off either the USB memory

device or the DTX-MULTI 12 while data is being

loaded or saved. Failure to observe this precaution

can lead to the USB memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 being permanently damaged.

• Be sure to always unplug USB memory devices from

the DTX-MULTI 12 before you start to play. If you

were to accidentally strike a memory device with a

drum stick while playing, it could be permanently

damaged and all data saved on it could be lost.

≥Now≥Saving

[EXIT]≥to≥cancel

Completed

CAUTION

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual

Using a computer, place the WAV or AIFF

ﬁle(s) for importing at the root directory of

a USB memory device.

Unplug the USB memory device from the

computer and plug it into the instrument

via the USB TO DEVICE port on the side

panel.

Press the [KIT] button to open the Select

Kit page and then select the drum kit to

which the imported wave(s) will be

assigned.

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press

the [WAVE] button to open the Import page.

Select the audio ﬁle you want to import

using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons.

When you have made your selection, press

the [ENTER] button to import the ﬁle.

Once the audio ﬁle has been imported, the

Pad Assign page will open. Select the pad

to which the imported wave is to be

assigned and press the [ENTER] button.

• If you set PadAssign to “off”, the imported wave will not be

assigned to any pad.

• Imported AIF and WAV audio ﬁles are stored as waves, or in

other words, as one of the three types of DTX-MULTI 12

voices. As such, they can be freely assigned to pads at any

time using the VOICE setting area (see page 56).

KIT1

U001:User≥Kit

IMPORT

≥≥≥Surdo.WAV

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB

TO DEVICE port or turn off either the USB memory

device or the DTX-MULTI 12 while data is being

loaded. Failure to observe this precaution can lead to

the USB memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12 being

permanently damaged.

• If the selected ﬁle is not 16-bit, the error message

“Illegal wave data.” will be displayed and the import

process will be halted. In such a case, please convert

the ﬁle to 16-bit using, for example, the bundled DAW

software and then repeat the import process.

• If a voice has already been assigned to the selected

pad, it will be deleted and replaced with the imported

wave.

Now≥Importing...

[EXIT]≥to≥cancel

CAUTION

IMPORT

≥PadAssign=º¡

CAUTION

NOTE

Importing Audio Files

WAV and AIFF audio ﬁles from your computer and other media can be imported into your DTX-MULTI 12 via

USB memory devices. Referred to as “waves”, these voices can then be assigned to pads and played in the

same way as any other preset voice.

• Only 16-bit audio ﬁles can be used with your DTX-MULTI 12. If the audio ﬁles you wish to use have been recorded with a differ-

ent bit depth, please convert them to 16-bit in advance using, for example, the bundled DAW software. For details regarding the

conversion method, refer to the DAW software’s manual.

•Your DTX-MULTI 12 can import audio ﬁles of up to approximately 23 seconds in length (in the case of 44.1-kHz, 16-bit audio).

• It is important to note that even when the above conditions are satisﬁed, certain other factors may make audio ﬁles incompatible

with the DTX-MULTI 12.

NOTE

26 Owner’s Manual

Importing Audio Files

Press the [KIT] button to return to the KIT

setting area.

Press the [STORE] button and store the

current kit and its new wave assignment as

a User kit.

As shown here, select an empty User kit using the [-/

DEC] and [+/INC] buttons, and then press the

[ENTER] button.

When asked to conﬁrm that you want to

store the kit, press the [ENTER] button to

proceed.

To hear the imported wave, strike the

pad to which it was assigned.

• The message ”Please keep power on...” will be dis-

played while data is being stored. It is very important

that the DTX-MULTI 12 is not turned off until this

message disappears. If the instrument were to be

turned off at this time, data for all User kits could be

permanently lost.

VCE≥Store≥to

U001:User≥Kit

User kit number User kit name

≥≥≥KIT≥Store

≥Are≥you≥sure?≥≥

CAUTION

≥≥Please≥keep

≥≥power≥on...

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Owner’s Manual 27

Internal Design

In this reference section, you will ﬁnd a description of what takes place within the DTX-MULTI 12 between striking of a

pad and the output of a sound from speakers. Understanding how signals ﬂow and are processed internally will allow

you to utilize the powerful functions of this versatile instrument to their maximum potential.

Functional Blocks

USB

TO HOST

USB

TO DEVICE

Tr igger signals

Makeup of each kit

Preset

voices

Waves

Preset

patterns

User patterns

MIDI messages

Import

Pattern

recording

Audio output

SMF ﬁle

(Format 0)

WAV ﬁle

AIFF ﬁle

MIDI output

Portable music

player, etc.

Trigger setup (Preset or User)

Kit (Preset or User)

Internal tone generator

Effects

Reverb, chorus, variation, and master EQ.

Preset voices, patterns, and waves are

assigned to each of the built-in pads, external

pads, and external controllers.

Each pad has up to four layers (A to D) to

which voices can be assigned.

Signals for control-

ling external tone

generators and

MIDI devices

Signals for controlling the

internal tone generator

Built-in pads

External pads, controllers, and foot switches

PAD jacks

Tr igger Signals

Reference

28 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

Pads & Trigger Signals

The DTX-MULTI 12 is played by striking any of the

twelve built-in pads and by striking and operating external

pads, foot switches, or other controllers connected via the

PAD jacks (M to Q), the HI-HAT CONTROL jack, and

the FOOT SW jack. Whenever you perform this type of

action, a trigger signal containing various items of perfor-

mance data, such as the strength with which the pad was

struck, will be produced. These trigger signals are deliv-

ered to a tone generator, which outputs the appropriate

sound in response.

■ Built-in Pads (1 to 12)

As shown below, each of the DTX-MULTI 12’s built-in

pads is assigned a unique number between 1 and 12. On the

various parameter-setting pages used to conﬁgure the

instrument, these numbers are presented in the format

to as a means of identifying individual pads. Although

Pads 4 to 9 (main pads) and Pads 1 to 3 and 10 to 12 (rims)

are shaped differently, they all function in exactly the same

way. Whenever they are struck, the assigned voices, waves,

or patterns will be played.

■ PAD Jacks (M to Q)

The trigger-input jacks provided on the rear panel are used

to connect optional pads. Furthermore, the PAD M jack

can be used to connect a three-zone pad, which produces

three different types of trigger signal based on the position

at which it is struck. The DTX-MULTI 12 treats these

zones as three individual pads, identifying them on-screen

as , , and . For example, the three trig-

ger signals output by a TP65S Three Zone Drum Pad are

identiﬁed as shown below.

A: When a trigger signal from rim 1 is received, the voices assigned to

Pad are played.

B: When a trigger signal from rim 2 is received, the voices assigned to

Pad are played.

C: When a trigger signal from the head is received, the voices assigned

to Pad are played.

Although each features just one connector, the PAD N/O

and PAD P/Q jacks can be used to connect the mono out-

puts from a pair of pads. In this way, each of these jacks

can handle two different trigger signals. Within the display,

the numbers , , , and are used to identify

the corresponding pads.

■ HI-HAT CONTROL Jack

The Hi-hat Control jack is used to connect an optional

RHH135 Two Zone Hi-Hat Pad (via its HH CTRL jack) or

an HH65 Hi-hat Controller (via its OUTPUT jack). As you

play the pad or controller, the DTX-MULTI 12 receives

and recognizes trigger signals for both hi-hat close and hi-

hat splash*. Within the display, these signals are identiﬁed

as and , respectively.

* Hi-hat splash refers to the technique of producing sound by rapidly

depressing and releasing the hi-hat pedal.

•Parameters related to hi-hats can be set on the various pages from the

UTILITY setting area’s HI-HAT section (UTIL5). (See page 89.)

º¡

¡™

¡º ¡¡ ¡™

º¶ º• ºª

º¢ º∞ º§

º¡ º™ º£

¡£ ¡£Ω¡ ¡£Ω™

¡£Ω¡

¡£Ω™

¡£

A: Rim 1

B: Rim 2

C: Head

Example: TP65S

¡£Ω¡

¡£Ω™

¡£

¡¢ ¡∞ ¡§ ¡¶

TP65

PCY65

When a trigger signal produced by striking the

TP65 Single Zone Drum Pad is received, the

voices assigned to Pad are played.

¡¢

Example:

Connecting a TP65 and a PCY65 via the PAD N/O jack

When a trigger signal produced by striking the

PCY65 Single Zone Cymbal Pad is received, the

voices assigned to Pad are played.

¡∞

∂∂œ› ∂∂‘á

HH65

RHH135

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 29

■ FOOT SW Jack

The Foot Switch jack is used to connect an optional hi-hat

controller (FC4 or FC5, etc.), hi-hat controller (HH65,

etc.), or foot controller (FC7) to the DTX-MULTI 12.

Within the instrument’s display, a signal input via this jack

is identiﬁed as .

Once you have told the DTX-MULTI 12 which type of

controller or foot switch is connected, you can then select

from a range of useful functions to assign to it. A number

of typical examples are described below.

• Be sure to always turn off the DTX-MULTI 12 before connecting a controller

or foot switch. If you do not follow this precaution, the controller or foot

switch may not function correctly.

● Using an HH65 as a bass drum pedal

[Function]

With parameters conﬁgured as described below, an HH65

Hi-hat Controller can be used to play bass-drum voices and

the like. As with acoustic drums, furthermore, the tone of

the sound produced can be inﬂuenced by how fast or slow

you depress the controller. In addition, drum sounds can be

produced without the vibration and mechanical noise typi-

cal of acoustic bass-drum pedals.

[Setup]

• With the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off, connect the HH65 Hi-

hat Controller via the FOOT SW jack.

•Turn on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• On the Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2), set FootSwIn-

Sel to “HH65”. (See page 89.)

• On the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), select and

then set Func to “off”. (See page 88.)

• Open the Select Voice page (VCE1) and choose a voice,

such as a bass drum, to be assigned to . (See

page 56.)

● Playing sounds using an FC4 or FC5

[Function]

With parameters conﬁgured as described below, you can

play sounds by operating an FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch. Trig-

ger signals generated in this way have a ﬁxed velocity, and

therefore, they are ideal for playing effect sounds, patterns,

and waves.

[Setup]

• With the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off, connect the FC4 or

FC5 Foot Switch via the FOOT SW jack.

•Turn on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• On the Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2), set FootSwIn-

Sel to “ftSw”. (See page 89.)

• On the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), select and

then set Func to “off”. (See page 88.)

• Open the Select Voice page (VCE1) and choose a preset

voice, pattern, or wave to be assigned to . (See

page 56.)

● Changing kits or patterns using an FC4 or FC5

[Function]

With parameters conﬁgured as described below, you can

use an FC4 or FC5 Foot Switch to change a range of differ-

ent settings. For example, you could operate a foot switch

to select the next kit or pattern, to increase or decrease the

tempo by 1, to tap the tempo, or to turn the click-track on

or off. Furthermore, you can also set a MIDI Control

Change message number and value to be sent when the foot

switch is depressed.

[Setup]

• With the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off, connect the FC4 or

FC5 Foot Switch via the FOOT SW jack.

•Turn on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• On the Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2), set FootSwIn-

Sel to “ftSw”. (See page 89.)

• On the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), select and

then set Func to the function you want to control using the

foot switch. (See page 88.)

● Adjusting volume (or other MIDI Control

Change values) using an FC7

[Function]

With parameters conﬁgured as described below, you can

adjust volume and many other MIDI Control Change val-

ues by changing the pedal angle of an FC7 Foot Controller

(in order to send MIDI Control Change messages). The

FC7 retains its current pedal angle after you remove your

foot, and therefore, it is ideal for making minute changes to

the controlled parameter.

[Setup]

• With the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off, connect the FC7 Foot

Controller via the FOOT SW jack.

•Turn on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• On the Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2), set FootSwIn-

Sel to “FC7”. (See page 89.)

• On the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), select and

then set Func to the MIDI Control Change message

(“CC01” to “CC95”) that you want to control. (See page

88.)

√¤‘’

NOTE

HH65

√¤‘’

FC4, FC5

√¤‘’

FC4, FC5

√¤‘’

FC7

√¤‘’

Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

●

Adjusting volume and other parameters using an

HH65

[Function]

In the same way as with an FC7 Foot Controller, you can

adjust volume and a wide range of MIDI Control Change

values by adjusting the degree by which an HH65 Hi-hat

Controller is operated.

[Setup]

• With the DTX-MULTI 12 turned off, connect the HH65 Hi-

hat Controller via the FOOT SW jack.

•Turn on the DTX-MULTI 12.

• On the Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2), set FootSwIn-

Sel to “HH65”. (See page 89.)

• On the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), select and

then set Func to the MIDI Control Change message

(“CC01” to “CC95”) that you want to control. (See page

88.)

■

Using Acoustic Drums to Produce Trigger

Signals

Optional drum triggers, such as the DT10 or DT20, can be

used to convert performances on acoustic drums into trig-

ger signals and to input these signals into the instrument.

You can even apply drum triggers to training pads in order

to produce trigger signals.

■

Trigger Setups

Settings for all of the parameters associated with pad sensi-

tivity are collectively referred to as a “trigger setup”. In

addition to the actual sensitivity of the pad when it is

struck, a trigger setup can also include parameter settings

intended to prevent a pair of trigger signals being produced

in response to a single strike (i.e., double triggering) and

unwanted trigger signals being produced by pads other

than the one that was struck (i.e., crosstalk). The DTX-

MULTI 12 supports many different playing styles using

sticks and hands, and by selecting the most appropriate

trigger setup for the style being used, you can ensure that

trigger signals will be correctly processed. Trigger setups

can also be adjusted in order to ensure that trigger signals

from external pads and controllers are processed in an ideal

manner.

Your DTX-MULTI 12 comes pre-loaded with ﬁve Preset

trigger setups suitable for many different needs, and you

can also create up to ten unique User trigger setups to suit

your own individual requirements.

■

Using Optional Pads & Drum Triggers with

the PAD Jacks

Whenever you are using separately-sold pads and/or drum

triggers, the types of trigger signal handled will depend on

which of the PAD jacks is used for connection. The follow-

ing table shows how optional pads and drum triggers will

operate when connected via the various PAD jacks on the

rear panel.

PAD

Suitable for use with two-zone and three-zone pads. Not

suitable for pad controllers.

PAD

, PAD

Not suitable for two-zone pads, three-

zone pads, or pad controllers.

A: Operates as a three-zone pad.

If using a compatible product from the TP series, voices assigned to

each of the two rim sections and the head section can be played. If

using a compatible product from the PCY series, voices assigned to

each of the bow, edge, and cup sections can be played.

B: Operates as a two-zone pad.

If using a compatible product from the RHH series, voices assigned

to each of the bow and edge sections can be played. If using a com-

patible product from the PCY series, voices assigned to each of the

bow and edge sections can be played.

C: Operates as a monoaural pad.

•For the most up-to-date information on support for optional pads and drum

triggers, visit the following web page.

http://dtxdrums.yamaha.com

HH65

√¤‘’

Model Product name

Input (PAD jacks)

PAD

TP65 Drum Pad C C

TP65S Drum Pad A C

TP100 Drum Pad A C

TP120SD Snare Pad B C

RHH130 Hi-hat Pad B C

RHH135 Hi-hat Pad B C

PCY65 Cymbal Pad C C

PCY65S Cymbal Pad B C

PCY130 Cymbal Pad C C

PCY130S Cymbal Pad B C

PCY130SC Cymbal Pad A C

PCY135 Cymbal Pad A C

PCY150S Cymbal Pad A C

PCY155 Cymbal Pad A C

KP65 Kick Pad C C

KP125 Kick Pad C C

DT10 Drum Trigger C C

DT20 Drum Trigger C C

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 31

Sounds Produced Using the Pads

Whenever the internal tone generator receives a trigger sig-

nal produced by striking a pad or by operating a controller

or foot switch, it will play a voice assigned to that pad, con-

troller, or foot switch. As described below, three different

types of voice are available for assigning – namely, preset

voices, patterns, and waves.

• Preset voices

Drum sounds such as snares, bass drums, and cymbals;

percussion sounds; and pitched-instrument sounds such

as piano, xylophone, and guitar.

• Patterns

One-shot or looped phrases containing performance data

for a range of different instruments.

• Waves

Audio ﬁles imported into the DTX-MULTI 12 from a

variety of sources.

To assign a voice to a pad, controller, or foot switch, access

the VOICE setting area’s Select Voice page (VCE1) by

pressing the [VOICE] button (and if necessary, the [B]

button). On this page, voices are categorized by instrument

type (in the case of preset voices), as patterns, or as waves.

While preset voices, patterns, and waves can all be

assigned to pads in the same way, it is important to remem-

ber that each voice type plays in a different way and is con-

ﬁgured using different parameters.

■ Preset Voices

As an electronic percussion instrument played by striking

pads, the DTX-MULTI 12 comes preloaded with a vast

library of drum sounds, such as snares, bass drums, and

cymbals, together with a broad spectrum of percussion-

instrument sounds. Also included are many pitched instru-

ments, such as piano, xylophone, and guitar. The term “pre-

set voices” is used to refer to these built-in drum and

instrument sounds.

Drum and percussion voices from this preset-voice collec-

tion are not rooted at one speciﬁc pitch; instead, you can

intuitively adjust their tuning in order to match the sounds

of other instruments. Meanwhile, pitched-instrument

voices such as piano and guitar can be assigned to pads

with a speciﬁc pitch setting, thus allowing you to play sev-

eral different notes together to produce chords, or with

voices at different semitones assigned to the twelve pads, to

freely play melodic parts. With the timing and strength of

your playing reﬂected in the sound produced by preset

voices, you can perform with practically the same level of

expressiveness as afforded by acoustic instruments.

■ Patterns

The DTX-MULTI 12 can also play rhythmic or melodic

phrases known as “patterns”. Capable of reproducing the

sound of performances on many different instruments, each

pattern can be up to several measures in length. In the same

way as snare sounds are produced by striking a pad to

which a snare voice has been assigned, you can start and

stop the playback of a pattern by striking the pad to which

it is assigned. In effect, pads with pattern assignments oper-

ate as start/stop switches whenever struck (regardless of

how hard or soft they are actually struck). Your DTX-

MULTI 12 comes pre-loaded with 128 Preset patterns

(including 3 demo patterns) containing performance data

from a host of different instrument genres, and by assign-

ing these freely to pads, you can easily create your own

unique kits. For even more ﬂexibility, you can also record

your own performances and even import standard MIDI

ﬁles (Format 0) to create up to 50 additional User patterns.

■ Waves

The DTX-MULTI 12 is fully equipped to playback audio

ﬁles that can be created, edited, and played on computers.

Commonly called “samples” or “sample data”, these ﬁles

contain short portions of sound, and once imported into the

DTX-MULTI 12, they are referred to as “waves”. Either

WAV or AIFF type audio ﬁles can be imported into the

instrument’s internal wave memory and assigned to pads in

much the same way as preset voices and patterns. You can

also edit imported waves.

As audio ﬁles imported into the instrument’s wave memory

are assigned to pads as a single voice much like preset

voices and patterns, the term “wave data” is used within

this manual in the same way as “preset voice data” or “pat-

tern data”. In contrast, the term “wave ﬁle” is used to refer

to data that has not yet been imported and is handled in the

form of a ﬁle on a computer, sampler, or USB memory

device.

32 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

Kit Makeup

The term “kit” is used to refer to a collection of preset

voices, patterns, and waves assigned to each of the instru-

ment’s built-in pads (1 to 12) and to any external pads, foot

switches, or controllers connected via the PAD jacks (M to

Q), the FOOT SW jack, and the HI-HAT CONTROL jack.

For added convenience, the instrument comes pre-loaded

with 30 different Preset kits. You are, however, free to make

your own unique kits in whatever way you see ﬁt, and up to

200 of these User kits can also be stored internally.

■ Kits & Voices

Within the DTX-MULTI 12, voice data is grouped and

stored in kit units. In other words, each kit contains the

voice-related information for all of its pad and controller

assignments. Whenever a User kit is created by editing

voices, the voices themselves are not stored within the kit;

instead, the settings for all associated parameters – such as

tuning, stereo pan, attack time, release time, effects, etc. –

are stored. As you would expect, each of the pads can have

different parameter settings. Therefore, even when the

Select Voice page shows the same voice assigned to two or

more pads, the sounds produced by each will not necessar-

ily be the same.

■ Voice Layers

Using the DTX-MULTI 12’s Layer function, you can

assign a number of different voices to a single pad or exter-

nal controller. Speciﬁcally, this instrument allows up to

four layers (A to D) to be setup per pad, meaning that each

pad can play as many as four different voices. These lay-

ered voices can also be triggered in a number of different

ways – for example, they will all play together in Stack

mode, a different one will be played for each strike in

Alternate mode, and they can be sustained and turned off

on each successive strike in Hold mode. In order that the

Layer function may be put to use, the pad in question must

ﬁrst be setup to send multiple MIDI messages whenever

struck. Then, voices are assigned to each of the layers, and

a layer playing mode is speciﬁed for the pad. For more

details, refer to the section Specifying MIDI note numbers

and assigning voices to each on page 34.

■ Information Contained in Kits

Three different setting areas apply speciﬁcally to kits: In

the KIT setting area, you can specify a volume, conﬁgure

effects, and set other parameters affecting the entire kit; in

the VOICE setting area, you can assign preset voices, pat-

terns, and waves to each pad, foot switch, and controller,

and you can also set parameters such as tuning and volume

for each of the assigned voices; and in the MIDI setting

area, you can set MIDI-related parameters affecting the kit

or individual pads and controllers. Setting a preset voice,

pattern, or wave to be played when a pad is struck involves

the following two steps.

1. Indication of the MIDI note number(s) to be sent

when a speciﬁc pad is struck. (MIDI setting area)

2. Indication of the preset voice, pattern, or wave to be

played for each MIDI note number. (VOICE setting

area)

In cases where only a single layer is setup for a pad, how-

ever, it is possible to omit Step 1 above. (The required set-

ting will be performed automatically when you select a

voice in Step 2.)

The following two methods of allocating voices are

described below.

• Assigning a voice directly to a pad

• Specifying MIDI note numbers and assigning voices

to each

VCE1 -º¡- ç

GM001:GrandPiano

VCE1 -º¡- ¬

GM025:NylonGtr

VCE1 -º¡- œ

GM041:Violin

VCE1 -º¡- ˚

GM051:SynthStr1

Arrangement of Voice Layers

Layer A

Layer B

Layer C

Layer D

When Pad 1 is struck, layers A through

D are all played simultaneously.

GM001:GrandPiano

GM025:NylonGtr

GM041:Violin

GM051:SynthStr1

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 33

● Assigning a voice directly to a pad

In order to assign a voice directly to a pad, we ﬁrst select

the pad to be set, and then choose the required preset voice,

pattern, or wave.

To start, press the [KIT] button to access the KIT setting

area. On the Select Kit page (KIT1), select the kit to be

set. Next, press the [VOICE] button to access the VOICE

setting area and navigate to the Select Voice page

(VCE1).

Move the ﬂashing cursor to the upper row of text, and

using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons, select the pad or

controller you want to set. You can also select a pad by

striking it. The lower row of text will show the voice (i.e.,

a preset voice, pattern, or wave) currently assigned to

the selected pad or controller. Move the ﬂashing cursor

down to the lower row of text, and using the [-/DEC] and

[+/INC] buttons, select the new voice to be assigned.

By repeating this process to assign preset voices, pat-

terns, and waves to all pads and controllers, you can

quickly and conveniently setup your own personalized

drum kit. Furthermore, parameters such as volume, tun-

ing, stereo pan, and effect levels can be set for the

voices assigned to the various pads and controllers.

Once you have ﬁnished conﬁguring a kit in this way, you

can store it as one of the instrument’s User kits.

VCE1≥≥-º¡-

Cy013:Thin16Eg

Voice assigned to the pad or controller

Pad or controller being set

Example: Working with Preset kit 1

Kit name

KIT setting area

VOICE setting area

Assigning a voice* to a

controller connected

via the HI-HAT CON-

TROL jack.

Assigning a voice* to a

controller or foot

switch connected via

the FOOT SW jack.

Assigning voices to pads

connected via the PAD

jacks

Assigning voices to built-in

pads 1 to 12.

Settings made in KIT setting area

•Volume of the entire kit

• Kit tempo

•Effect settings for the entire kit

• Muting

• Hi-hat settings

etc.

Settings made in VOICE

setting area

•Volume of each pad (or layer)

•Tuning of each pad

• Stereo pan of each pad

•Effect settings for each pad

etc.

*: Voices cannot be assigned to

any controller or foot switch

already having a function

assigned on the Pad Func-

tion page (UTIL4-1).

KIT1

P009:Oak≥Custom

VCE1≥≥-º¡-

Cy013:Thin16Eg

VCE1≥≥-¡™-≥≥≥≥≥ç

HH005:Brite≥Op

VCE1≥≥-¡£-

Sn001:Oak≥Custom

VCE1≥≥-¡£Ω¡-

Sn002:OakCtmOpRm

VCE1≥≥-¡£Ω™-

Sn003:OakCtmClRm

VCE1≥≥-¡¢-

Kk001:OakCtm22

VCE1≥≥-¡¶-≥≥≥≥≥ç

HH006:Brite≥EgOp

VCE1≥≥-√¤‘’-

-----:----------

VCE1≥≥-∂∂œ›-

HH003:Brite≥FtCl

VCE1≥≥-∂∂‘á-

HH004:Brite≥FtOp

34 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

● Specifying MIDI note numbers and assigning

voices to each

The second approach to conﬁguring a pad involves setting

one or more MIDI note numbers to be sent whenever the

pad is struck and then telling the internal tone generator

which voices to play when MIDI notes with these numbers

are received. In contrast to the direct approach described

above, this method allows multiple MIDI Note messages to

be sent from a single pad in order to play layered or alter-

nating voices using the Layer function. In addition, these

MIDI Note messages can also be output via the MIDI OUT

connector or USB TO HOST port in order to control

another MIDI instrument.

In the following example, we will setup built-in Pad 1 to

play two different voices simultaneously when it is struck.

Press the [KIT] button to access the KIT setting area. On

the Select Kit page (KIT1), select the kit to be set.

Press the [MIDI] button to access the MIDI setting area

and navigate to the Select Message Type page (MIDI1).

In the upper row of text, select “ ” as the pad to

be set. Following this, move the ﬂashing cursor to the

lower row of text and set the MessageType parameter to

“note” (indicating that a MIDI Note message will be

sent when the pad is struck).

Press the [ENTER] button to open the Playing Mode

page (MIDI1-1).

In the lower row of text, set the Mode parameter to

“stack” (indicating that all MIDI notes assigned to the

pad will be played simultaneously).

• In addition to “stack”, you can also set the Mode parameter to “alter-

nate”, which causes the notes assigned to the pad to play individually

in turn each time it is struck, or “hold”, which causes the notes to be

alternately turned on and off each time the pad is struck. (See page

62.)

Press the [CC

] button to navigate to the MIDI Note page

(MIDI1-2).

On this page, we can set the MIDI notes to be sent by

the pad. Speciﬁcally, the Note parameter on the lower

row of text is used to set a MIDI note number, while the

indicator in the top right corner shows which of the

pad’s four layers (A to D) is being set. For now, select

“D1/38” as the MIDI note to be sent by Layer A.

Press the [VOICE] button to access the VOICE setting

area and navigate to the Select Voice page (VCE1).

On the upper row of text, use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons to select “D1/38” – that is, the MIDI note num-

ber that Layer A of Pad 1 will send. On the lower row of

text, set “Sn001:OakCustom” as the voice to be played

for that MIDI note number.

With the settings now made, a MIDI note with MIDI note

number 38 (i.e., D1) will be sent to the internal tone gener-

ator whenever Pad 1 is struck, and the tone generator will

respond by playing the preset voice Sn001 (OakCustom).

Next, we will setup Pad 1 to also send the MIDI note num-

ber 40 (E1) whenever struck, and we will tell the internal

tone generator to play the preset voice Cy013 (Thin16Eg)

in response.

Press the [MIDI] button to access the MIDI setting area

and navigate to the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2).

Move the ﬂashing cursor to the “ ” indicator in the top

right corner, and using the [+/INC] button, change this

to “ ”. Move back to the lower row of text, and set

“E1/40” as the MIDI note number to be sent by Layer

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=note

Pad

-º¡-

MIDI1-1≥-º¡-

≥Mode=stack

NOTE

MIDI1-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

Note=≥≥≥D≥1/≥38

Layer

VCE1≥≥≥D≥1/≥38

Sn001:OakCustom

MIDI note number

Assigned voice

MIDI1-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥¬

Note=≥≥≥E≥1/≥40

Layer

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 35

Press the [VOICE] button, navigate to the Select Voice

page (VCE1), and in the same way as described above,

set “Cy013:Thin16Eg” as the voice to be played for MIDI

notes with the MIDI note number 40 (E1).

With your DTX-MULTI 12 conﬁgured in this way, when-

ever you strike built-in Pad 1, two MIDI notes with the

MIDI note numbers 38 (D1) and 40 (E1) will be simulta-

neously sent to the internal tone generator, and the tone

generator will respond by playing the preset voices Sn001

(OakCustom) and Cy013 (Thin16Eg) together.

The following diagram illustrates exactly what happens

inside the instrument when Pad 1 has been setup to play

two voices simultaneously as described above.

■ Using the DTX-MULTI 12 as a MIDI Control-

ler

Instead of MIDI Note messages, the DTX-MULTI 12 can

be setup to send MIDI Program Change messages, MIDI

Control Change messages, and the like to MIDI devices

connected via the MIDI OUT connector or USB TO HOST

port whenever pads are struck or external controllers are

operated. Using this functionality, you can easily conﬁgure

pads to, for example, start and stop playback on a MIDI

sequencer or to change presets on a MIDI instrument.

In contrast to the type of control introduced in the Pads &

Trigger Signals section (see page 28), which makes it pos-

sible to play the DTX-MULTI 12 with trigger signals sent

from a controller or foot switch connected via the FOOT

SW jack, the MIDI control function allows the instrument’s

built-in pads and external pads to operate as versatile MIDI

controllers. In addition to selecting frequently-used kits

and patterns or setting the tempo for click-track or pattern

playback, this powerful function also allows you to assign

MIDI Control Change numbers (01 to 95) and values to

pads in order to facilitate a wide range of unique modes of

use.

VCE1≥≥≥≥E≥1/≥40

Cy013:Thin16Eg

240

108 127

Built-in Pad 1 is struck.

Two MIDI notes (“D1/38”

and “E1/40”) are simulta-

neously sent to the internal

tone generator.

MIDI note numbers on a standard keyboard.

The voices assigned to

each of these MIDI notes

are played.

Cy013: Thin16Eg

cymbal sound

Sn001: OakCustom

snare sound

36 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

Effects

The effect processor built into your DTX-MULTI 12

applies special audio effects to the output from the tone

generator in order to modify and enhance its sound in a

wide variety of ways. Normally applied during the ﬁnal

stages of editing, such effects allow you to optimize the

sound in line with your own speciﬁc requirements.

■ Effect Processor Structure

This instrument can apply effects to the tone generator’s

output using the following four effect units.

● Variation

Variation effects allow you to sculpt your sound in a variety

of different ways. A speciﬁc type of variation effect can be

selected for each kit within the VARIATION section

(KIT4); furthermore, you can also specify the degree to

which this effect is applied to each layer on the Variation

Send page (VCE4-1).

● Chorus

Chorus effects change the spatial characteristics of the

sounds to which they are applied. A speciﬁc type of chorus

effect can be selected for each kit within the CHORUS sec-

tion (KIT5); furthermore, you can also specify the degree

to which this effect is applied to each layer on the Chorus

Send page (VCE4-2).

● Reverb

Reverb effects add a warm ambience to sounds, simulating

the complex reﬂections of actual performance spaces, such

as a concert hall or a small club. A speciﬁc type of reverb

can be selected for each kit within the REVERB section

(KIT6); furthermore, you can also specify the degree to

which this effect is applied to each layer on the Reverb

Send page (VCE4-3).

• The degree to which User patterns are processed by these effect units can

be speciﬁed on the Variation Send page (PTN3-5), the Chorus Send page

(PTN3-6), and the Reverb Send page (PTN3-7); furthermore, these set-

tings can then be saved as part of the User pattern data.

● Master EQ

Processing the overall instrument sound just before output,

the Master EQ supports ﬁve-band equalization. As this

equalization is applied to the sound of the entire instrument

and not that of individual drum kits or voices, Master EQ

settings do not change whenever a new drum kit is selected.

To set the corresponding parameters, use the parameter-set-

ting pages from the UTILITY setting area’s MASTER EQ

section (UTIL3).

■ Effect Connection

NOTE

AUX IN

Dry signal

Pan

KIT4-3

VarPan

KIT5-3

ChoPan

KIT6-3

RevPan

KIT4-4

VarToRev

(Wet line)

(Dry line)

Pan

*1: Click-track voices cannot be sent to effects.

*2: On the Variation Send page (VCE4-1), you can set the required balance

between the amount of the signal that will bypass the effect (i.e., the dry

level) and the amount that will be sent to the effect (i.e., the wet level).

*3: Master EQ is not applied to the headphone output.

*4: External audio signals (AUX IN) bypass all effects.

KIT6-2

RevReturn

KIT3-2

VCE4-3

MIDI3-7

ReverbSend

KIT3-1

VCE4-2

MIDI3-6

ChorusSend

VCE4-1

MIDI3-5

Var(Dry)

VARIATION

CHORUS

REVERB

KIT5-2

ChoReturn

KIT4-2

VarReturn

Master EQ

KIT4-5

VarToCho

KIT5-4

ChoToRev

KIT6

REVERB

KIT5

CHORUS

KIT4

VARIATION

UTIL3

MASTER EQ

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 37

■ Effects & Effect Categories

The various individual effects provided by this instrument’s

effect units are sorted into a number of different categories.

What follows is a description of each category and the

effects it contains. We recommend that you refer to these

descriptions whenever setting effects. Each category’s

effect table indicates which of the effect units – i.e., Reverb

(Rev), Chorus (Cho), or Variation (Var) – can be used to

apply the effect in question. Any effect marked using a

✓

symbol can be selected and modiﬁed on the corresponding

effect unit’s parameter setting pages.

● Compressor & EQ

The compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and

compress the dynamics (i.e., softness or loudness) of an

audio signal. In the case of vocals, guitar parts, and other

signals that have widely varying dynamics, this effect

essentially squeezes the dynamic range, making soft

sounds louder and loud sounds softer. Furthermore, a com-

pressor’s attack and decay characteristics can be adjusted

to modify how punchy or sustained an audio signal sounds.

Multi-band compression, meanwhile, splits the input into

three different frequency bands for processing indepen-

dently of each other; accordingly, this type of effect can be

thought of as combining compression with equalization.

● Flanger & Phaser

A ﬂanger creates a swirling, metallic sound, similar to that

of a jet plane. While this effect operates using the same

basic principles as chorus effects, it uses shorter delay

times and also incorporates feedback to produce a very dis-

tinctive swelling sound. Rather than being used constantly

throughout a song, it is more suited to selective use in spe-

ciﬁc sections in order to add variety. A phaser, meanwhile,

introduces a phase shift into the sound being processed

before returning it to the effect input using a feedback cir-

cuit in order to produce a characteristic animated yet mel-

low tone. Gentler overall than a ﬂanger, this effect can be

put to use in a wider range of situations, and for example, is

often used with electric pianos to sweeten their sound in a

variety of ways.

● Distortion

As its name suggests, a distortion effect distorts the sound

fed into it. It produces a sound similar to that of an ampli-

ﬁer turned up too high or fed with a signal that is already

sufﬁciently loud. This type of effect is widely used to add a

harsh, biting edge; furthermore, the resultant sound is char-

acterized by overall thickness and long sustain times. This

thickness comes from the large numbers of harmonics con-

tained within clipped signals. Meanwhile, the longer sus-

tain is not produced by the original sound being stretched;

rather, it is produced when the slowly-fading release por-

tion that cannot normally heard is ampliﬁed and distorted.

Effect Type Var Description

Compressor ✓

Relatively fast-acting compressor well

suited to solo performances.

MltBndComp ✓ Three-band compressor.

3 Band EQ ✓

Three-band compressor also featuring

equalization.

Vintage EQ ✓ Vintage ﬁve-band parametric equalizer.

Enhancer ✓

Adds higher-order harmonics to enhance a

sound’s presence.

Effect Type Cho Var Description

SPX Flanger ✓✓Produces a swirling, metallic sound.

TempoFlanger ✓✓Tempo-synchronized ﬂanger.

PhaserMono – ✓ Vintage sounding mono phaser.

PhaserStereo – ✓ Vintage sounding stereo phaser.

TempoPhaser – ✓ Tempo-synchronized phaser.

Effect Type Var Description

AmpSim 1 ✓ Guitar amp simulation.

AmpSim 2 ✓ Guitar amp simulation.

CompDist ✓ Combines compression and distortion.

CompDistDly ✓

Combines compression, distortion, and

delay.

38 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

● Wah

A wah effect dynamically changes the frequency character-

istic of a ﬁlter in order to produce a highly unique ﬁlter-

sweep sound. Auto wah changes the frequency in a cyclic

manner using an LFO, while touch wah performs ﬁlter

sweeps in response to the volume of the input signal.

● Reverb

Reverb effects model the complex reverberation produced

by sounds within enclosed spaces. In this way, they add a

natural-sounding sustain, which produces a feeling of

depth and space. Furthermore, different types of reverb –

such as hall, room, plate, and stage – can be used to simu-

late the sound of acoustic environments of varying sizes

and constructions.

● Chorus

Chorus reproduces the sound of multiple instruments play-

ing in unison for a thicker, deeper tone. As all instruments

differ slightly from each other in terms of pitch and phase,

their playing together produces an overall sound that is

warmer and more spacious. In order to reproduce this type

of behavior, chorus effects make use of delay. Speciﬁcally,

a delayed, second version of the original signal is produced

and given a vibrato-type effect by varying its delay time

over a period of approximately one second using an LFO.

When this second version is mixed back into the original

signal, the resulting tone sounds as if multiple instruments

are being played in unison.

● Tremolo & Rotary

Tremolo effects are characterized by the way in which they

modulate volume in a cyclical fashion. An auto-pan effect,

meanwhile, moves the sound from left to right in a similar

cyclical manner, and a rotary speaker effect simulates the

distinctive vibrato of rotary-type speakers often used with

organs. In a rotary speaker, the horn and rotor are spun in

order to create highly unique sounds using the Doppler

Effect.

Effect Type VAR Description

AutoWah ✓ Vintage automatic wah effect.

TouchWah ✓ Classic volume-responsive wah effect.

TouchWahDist ✓

Touch wah with distortion applied at the out-

put.

Effect Type Rev Var Description

SPX Hall ✓✓

Emulation of hall acoustics using an

algorithm derived from the classic

Yamaha SPX1000 Digital Multi-

Effects Processor.

SPX Room ✓✓

Emulation of room acoustics using

an algorithm derived from the clas-

sic Yamaha SPX1000 Digital Multi-

Effects Processor.

SPX Stage ✓✓

Emulation of stage acoustics using

an algorithm derived from the clas-

sic Yamaha SPX1000 Digital Multi-

Effects Processor.

R3 Hall ✓ –

Emulation of the acoustics of a con-

cert hall using an algorithm derived

from the Yamaha ProR3 – a digital

reverberator for professional-audio

applications.

R3 Room ✓ –

Emulation of room acoustics using

an algorithm derived from the

above-mentioned Yamaha ProR3.

R3 Plate ✓ –

Emulation of plate reverb using an

algorithm derived from the above-

mentioned Yamaha ProR3.

EarlyRef – ✓

Early reﬂections without any subse-

quent reverberation.

GateReverb – ✓ Simulation of gated reverb.

ReverseGate – ✓

Simulation of gated reverb played in

reverse.

Effect Type Var Cho Description

G Chorus ✓✓

Rich, deep chorus with complex mod-

ulation.

2 Modulator ✓✓

Chorus effect allowing pitch and

amplitude modulation to be adjusted

for a more natural, spacious tone.

SPX Chorus ✓✓

Enhances modulation and spacious-

ness using a 3-phase LFO.

Symphonic ✓✓

Multi-stage modulation for a wider-

sounding chorus.

Ensemble – ✓

Modulation-free chorus achieved by

adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.

Effect Type Var Description

AutoPan ✓

Cyclically moves the sound between left and

right channels.

Tremolo ✓

Cyclically modulates the volume of the pro-

cessed signal.

RotarySp ✓ Rotary speaker simulator.

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 39

● Delay

Delay effects create a delayed version of the input signal,

and as such, they can be used for many different purposes,

such as creating a sense of spaciousness or thickening a

sound.

● Miscellaneous

This category contains effect types not included in the

other categories.

■ Effect Parameters

Each of the above-mentioned effects includes a range of

parameters allowing you to adjust the way in which it pro-

cesses the input signal. Using these parameters, the behav-

ior of each effect can be optimized in line with, for

example, the type of sound being processed or the type of

music being played. While the function of each of these

parameters is described in the following table, it is good

practice to also listen to how they actually change the

sound of the respective effect in order to achieve the best

settings.

● Parameters with identical names

• Certain effects contain parameters with identical names yet performing dif-

ferent functions. In the following table, the function of each such parameter

is described separately and the corresponding effects are identiﬁed.

*1 The Bottom parameter’s setting is valid only when less than that of

the Top parameter.

*2 The Color parameter’s setting has no effect with certain combina-

tions of Mode and Stage settings.

Effect Type Var Description

CrossDelay ✓

A pair of delays featuring cross-over feed-

back to produce a sound that swirls

between the left and right channels.

TempoCrosDly ✓

A pair of delays with cross-over feedback

and a tempo-synchronized delay time.

TempoDlyMono ✓

A single mono delay synchronized with the

instrument’s tempo.

TempoDlySt ✓

A stereo delay synchronized with the

instrument’s tempo.

Delay LR ✓

A delay with separate left and right chan-

nels.

Delay LCR ✓

A triple delay processing left, right, and

center channels independently.

Delay LR St ✓

A stereo delay with fully independent left

and right channels.

Effect Type Var Description

Isolator ✓

Controls the volume of individual frequency

bands using powerful ﬁlters.

Telephone ✓

Reproduces the sound of telephone speech

by cutting high and low frequencies.

TalkingMod ✓

Incorporates a vowel-type formant into the

input signal.

PitchChange ✓ Changes the pitch of the input signal.

Parameter

name

Descriptions

AMDepth

This parameter is used to set the depth of amplitude

modulation.

AmpType

This parameter is used to set the type of ampliﬁer to be

simulated.

Attack

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before compression is fully applied.

Bottom*

This parameter is used to set the lowest point in the ﬁl-

ter’s sweep range.

Color*

This parameter is used to set the ﬁxed phase modula-

tion.

CommonRel

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before the compressor stops processing the

input signal (common for all three bands).

Compres

This parameter is used to set the input-signal level at

which the compressor starts to process the sound (i.e.,

the threshold).

Cutoff

This parameter is used to set the offset value for the ﬁl-

ter’s control frequency.

Delay

This parameter is used to set the delay time in terms of

note lengths.

DelayC

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the cen-

ter channel.

DelayL

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the left

channel.

DelayL>R

This parameter is used to set the time that elapses

between input of sound via the left channel and output

via the right channel.

DelayR

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the right

channel.

DelayR>L

This parameter is used to set the time that elapses

between input of sound via the right channel and output

via the left channel.

Density

[Reverb effects other than EarlyRef]

This parameter is used to set the reverb density.

[Early Ref]

This parameter is used to set the density of early reﬂec-

tions.

Depth

This parameter is used to set the amplitude of the LFO

wave that controls cyclic changes in phase modulation.

Detune

This parameter is used to set the degree to which

pitches are detuned.

Device

This parameter is used to select one of a number of

devices that distort the sound in different ways.

Diffuse

[TempoPhaser and EarlyRef]

This parameter is used to adjust the spaciousness of the

sound produced.

[Reverb effects other than EarlyRef]

This parameter is used to set how wide the reverb

sounds.

Directn

This parameter is used to set the direction of envelope-

follower modulation.

Div.FreqH

This parameter is used to set the mid-high frequency

when splitting the sound into three bands.

Div.FreqL

This parameter is used to set the low-mid frequency

when splitting the sound into three bands.

NOTE

40 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

Parameter

name

Descriptions

DlyLvlC

This parameter is used to set the delay volume for the

center channel.

DlyMix

This parameter is used to set the mixing level for the

delayed sound.

DlyOfst

This parameter is used to set the modulation delay

time’s offset value.

Drive

This parameter is used to set the degree to which the

effect is applied.

DriveHorn

This parameter is used to set the depth of modulation

produced through rotation of the high-frequency horn.

DriveRotor

This parameter is used to set the depth of modulation

produced through rotation of the low-frequency rotor.

DstL.Gain

This parameter is used to set the degree by which the

low frequencies from the distorted sound are boosted or

cut.

DstM.Gain

This parameter is used to set the degree by which the

mid frequencies from the distorted sound are boosted or

cut.

Edge

This parameter is used to specify a curve that deter-

mines how the sound is distorted.

EQ1Freq

This parameter is used to set the cutoff frequency for the

EQ1 band (i.e., low shelving).

EQ1Gain

This parameter is used to set the gain for the EQ1 band

(i.e., low shelving).

EQ2Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency for

the EQ2 band.

EQ2Gain This parameter is used to set the gain for the EQ2 band.

EQ2Q

This parameter is used to set the resonance of the EQ2

band.

EQ3Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency for

the EQ3 band.

EQ3Gain This parameter is used to set the gain for the EQ3 band.

EQ3Q

This parameter is used to set the resonance of the EQ3

band.

EQ4Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency for

the EQ4 band.

EQ4Gain This parameter is used to set the gain for the EQ4 band.

EQ4Q

This parameter is used to set the resonance of the EQ4

band.

EQ5Freq

This parameter is used to set the cutoff frequency for the

EQ5 band (i.e., high shelving).

EQ5Gain

This parameter is used to set the gain for the EQ5 band

(i.e., high shelving).

ER/Rev

This parameter is used to set the relative volumes of

early reﬂections and reverberation.

F/RDpth

This parameter is used to set the front-to-rear pan depth

(and is valid only when PanDirectn is set to “Lturn” or

“Rturn”).

FBHiDmp

This parameter is used to set how the feedback sound

decays in the high-frequency band (with smaller values

corresponding to faster decay).

FBLevel

[Chorus effects, Delay effects, and TempoFlanger]

This parameter is used to set how much of the delay

sound is fed back into the effect’s input (with negative

values indicating that its phase is to be inverted).

[TempoPhaser]

This parameter is used to set how much of the phaser’s

output is fed back into its input (with negative values indi-

cating that its phase is to be inverted).

[Reverb effects]

This parameter is used to set the initial delay’s feedback

level.

FBLvl1

This parameter is used to set the feedback level for the

ﬁrst delay sound.

FBLvl2

This parameter is used to set the feedback level for the

second delay sound.

FBTime This parameter is used to set the feedback delay time.

FBTime1

This parameter is used to set the delay time for feedback

delay 1.

FBTime2

This parameter is used to set the delay time for feedback

delay 2.

FBTimeL

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the left

feedback delay.

FBTimeR

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the right

feedback delay.

Feedback

This parameter is used to set how much of the effect’s

output is fed back into its input.

Fine1

This parameter is used to adjust the ﬁrst ﬁne-pitch set-

ting.

Fine2

This parameter is used to adjust the second ﬁne-pitch

setting.

H.Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency of the

high-frequency EQ band.

H.Gain

This parameter is used to set the amount by which the

high-frequency EQ band is boosted or cut.

Height

This parameter is used to set the height of the simulated

room.

HiAtk

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before compression is fully applied in the high-

frequency band.

HiGain

This parameter is used to set the output level of the high-

frequency band.

HiLvl This parameter is used to set the high-frequency level.

HiMute

This parameter is used to activate and deactivate high-

frequency muting.

HiRat

[MltBndComp]

This parameter is used to set the compression ratio for

the high-frequency band.

[Reverb effects]

This parameter is used to adjust the high-frequency

component.

HiTh

This parameter is used to set the input-signal level at

which the compressor starts to process the sound in the

high-frequency band.

HornF

This parameter is used to set the speed of rotation of the

high-frequency horn at the “fast” setting.

HornS

This parameter is used to set the speed of rotation of the

high-frequency horn at the “slow” setting.

HPF

This parameter is used to set the high-pass ﬁlter’s cutoff

frequency.

InitDly

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before early reﬂections are produced.

InitDly1

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the ﬁrst

delay.

InitDly2

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the sec-

ond delay.

InitDlyL

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the left-

channel delay.

InitDlyR

This parameter is used to set the delay time for the right-

channel delay.

InpMode

This parameter is used to switch between mono and ste-

reo input.

InpSelect This parameter is used to select an input.

L.Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency of the

low-frequency EQ band.

L.Gain

This parameter is used to set the amount by which the

low-frequency EQ band is boosted or cut.

L/RDiffuse

This parameter is used to set the difference between left

and right delay times in order to produce a more spa-

cious sound.

L/RDpth

This parameter is used to set the depth of the left-right

panning effect.

Lag

This parameter is used to set a time lag for delay times

speciﬁed in terms of note lengths.

LFODpth

[SPX Flanger, TempoFlanger, SPX Chorus, and Sym-

phonic]

This parameter is used to set the depth of modulation.

[Tempo Phaser]

This parameter is used to set the depth of phase modu-

lation.

LFODiff

This parameter is used to set the left-right phase differ-

ence between modulation waveforms.

Parameter

name

Descriptions

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual 41

*3 The Top parameter’s setting is valid only when equal to or greater

than that of the Bottom parameter.

LFOSpeed

[TempoFlanger, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus,

Symphonic, and Tremolo]

This parameter is used to set the modulation frequency.

[TempoPhaser]

This parameter is used to set the modulation speed in

terms of note lengths.

[AutoPan]

This parameter is used to set the auto-pan frequency.

LFOWave

[AutoWah]

This parameter is used to specify whether the ﬁlter-

sweep effect is produced using a sine or square wave.

[AutoPan]

This parameter is used to set the panning curve.

Livenss

This parameter is used to set the way in which early

reﬂections decay.

LowAtk

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before compression is fully applied in the low-

frequency band.

LowGain

This parameter is used to set the output level of the low-

frequency band.

LowLvl This parameter is used to set the low-frequency level.

LowMute

This parameter is used to activate and deactivate low-

frequency muting.

LowRat

[MltBndComp]

This parameter is used to set the compression ratio for

the low-frequency band.

[Reverb effects]

This parameter is used to adjust the low-frequency com-

ponent.

LowTh

This parameter is used to set the input-signal level at

which the compressor starts to process the sound in the

low-frequency band.

LPF

This parameter is used to set the low-pass ﬁlter’s cutoff

frequency.

M.Freq

This parameter is used to set the center frequency of the

mid-frequency EQ band.

M.Gain

This parameter is used to set the amount by which the

mid-frequency EQ band is boosted or cut.

M.Width

This parameter is used to set the width of the mid-fre-

quency EQ band.

Manual

This parameter is used to set the phase-modulation off-

set value.

MicAngl

This parameter is used to set the left-right inclination of

the microphone used to capture the speaker’s output.

MidAtk

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses before compression is fully applied in the mid-

frequency band.

MidGain

This parameter is used to set the output level of the mid-

frequency band.

MidLvl This parameter is used to set the mid-frequency level.

MidMute

This parameter is used to activate and deactivate mid-

frequency muting.

MidRat

This parameter is used to set the compression ratio for

the mid-frequency band.

MidTh

This parameter is used to set the input-signal level at

which the compressor starts to process the sound in the

mid-frequency band.

MixLvl

This parameter is used to set how much of the effect

sound is mixed back into the dry sound.

Mode

This parameter is used to adjust the mode of operation

of the phaser.

MoveSpeed

This parameter is used to specify the amount of time that

elapses until the sound set using the Vowel parameter is

produced.

On/Off

This parameter is used to activate and deactivate the

isolator.

OutLvl This parameter is used to set the output level.

OutLvl1 This parameter is used to set the ﬁrst-stage output level.

OutLvl2

This parameter is used to set the second-stage output

level.

Output This parameter is used to set the output level.

Parameter

name

Descriptions

OverDr

This parameter is used to adjust the way in which the

sound distorts.

Pan1

This parameter is used to set the ﬁrst stereo-panning

position.

Pan2

This parameter is used to set the second stereo-panning

position.

PanDirectn This parameter is used to set the auto-pan type.

PhShiftOfst

This parameter is used to set the phase-modulation off-

set value.

Pitch1

This parameter is used to set the ﬁrst pitch in semi-tone

units.

Pitch2

This parameter is used to set the second pitch in semi-

tone units.

PMDepth

This parameter is used to set the depth of pitch modula-

tion.

Presenc

Often seen on guitar ampliﬁers and the like, this parame-

ter is used to control the high-frequency band.

Ratio This parameter is used to set the compression ratio.

Release

This parameter is used to set the amount of time that

elapses until the sound is no longer being compressed.

Resonance This parameter is used to set the resonance of the ﬁlter.

ResoOfst This parameter is used to set the resonance offset value.

RevDly

This parameter is used to set the interval between early

reﬂections and subsequent reverberation.

RevTime This parameter is used to set the reverb time.

RoomSize This parameter is used to set the size of the room.

Rotor/Horn

This parameter is used to set the relative volumes of the

high-frequency horn and the low-frequency rotor.

RotorF

This parameter is used to set the speed of rotation of the

low-frequency rotor at the “fast” setting.

RotorS

This parameter is used to set the speed of rotation of the

low-frequency rotor at the “slow” setting.

Sens

This parameter is used to set how sensitive the wah ﬁlter

is to changes in the input level.

S-FTmHorn

This parameter is used to set how long it takes for the

high-frequency horn to switch between fast and slow

rotation speeds.

S-FTmRotor

This parameter is used to set how long it takes for the

low-frequency rotor to switch between fast and slow

rotation speeds.

Speaker

This parameter is used to select the type of speaker to

be simulated.

Speed

[PhaserMono and PhaserStereo]

This parameter is used to set the frequency of the LFO

that controls cyclic changes in phase modulation.

[AutoWah]

This parameter is used to set the LFO speed.

SpeedCtrl

This parameter is used to set the rotation speed as “fast”

or “slow”.

Spread

This parameter is used to set how wide the effect’s out-

put sounds.

Stage

This parameter is used to set the number of phase-ﬁlter

steps.

Thresh

This parameter is used to set the input-signal level at

which the effect starts to process the sound.

Top

This parameter is used to set the highest point in the ﬁl-

ter’s sweep range.

Type

[Wah effects]

This parameter is used to set the wah-effect type.

[EarlyRef, GateReverb, and ReverseGate]

This parameter is used to set the reﬂected-sound type.

Vowel This parameter is used to select a vowel type.

Parameter

name

Descriptions

42 Owner’s Manual

Internal Design

Internal Memory

By storing User kits, User patterns, and waves that you

have created and edited in the DTX-MULTI 12’s internal

memory, you ensure that they will always be available for

use, even after the instrument has been turned off. In addi-

tion, User trigger setups and the settings from the UTIL-

ITY setting area can also be stored in memory for reuse.

■ Data Retained by the DTX-MULTI 12

The following types of setting data can be stored in the

instrument’s internal memory.

● User kits

Original drum kits that you have created by assigning

voices to pads and external controllers can be stored as

User kits in the instrument’s memory. After doing so, you

can then recall these kits at any time in the same way as

Preset kits. In total, up to 200 User kits can be stored, and

they will be available even after the DTX-MULTI 12 has

been turned off. In addition to settings from the KIT area,

each User kit also retains associated data conﬁgured in the

VOICE and MIDI setting areas.

● User patterns

User patterns – which may be put to use in exactly the

same way as Preset patterns – can be created by recording

your performances on the DTX-MULTI 12 or by importing

standard MIDI ﬁles (Format 0). The corresponding data is

stored as a User pattern within the DTX-MULTI 12 as it is

recorded or imported, and the pattern will then be available

even after the DTX-MULTI 12 has been turned off. Up to

50 of these User patterns can be stored internally.

● Waves

Wave data created by importing either WAV or AIFF type

audio ﬁles from a USB memory device (connected via the

USB TO DEVICE port) is automatically stored within the

DTX-MULTI 12 and can then be assigned to pads for play-

back in the same way as preset voices and patterns. In total,

up to 500 of these waves can be stored, ensuring that they

will be available even after the DTX-MULTI 12 has been

turned off.

● User trigger setups

The DTX-MULTI 12 can also store a number of original

User trigger setups, which you can conveniently prepare by

customizing a Preset trigger setup. In speciﬁc terms, the

instrument’s internal memory can hold ten of these setups,

ensuring that they will always be available, even after the

power has been turned off and back on.

● UTILITY area settings

The parameter settings that you have conﬁgured within the

UTILITY setting area can also be stored in the DTX-

MULTI 12’s internal memory. In this way, they can be

instantly recalled whenever the instrument is turned on.

■ Editing & Storing User Kits

Whenever you select a drum kit, the corresponding data is

loaded into a non-permanent area of internal memory

known as the Edit Buffer. If any of the kit’s parameter set-

tings are changed, it is the data within the Edit Buffer – not

the stored version – that is modiﬁed. In this way, User kits

can be protected from accidental or unintended modiﬁca-

tion.

The purpose of the Edit Buffer is to hold a temporary ver-

sion of the kit being edited, and therefore, if a new kit is

selected without storing any modiﬁcations, those modiﬁca-

tions will be lost (i.e., overwritten with the settings from

the newly selected kit). In addition, modiﬁcations to the kit

in the Edit Buffer will also be lost when the DTX-MULTI

12 is turned off if they are not stored in advance. It is good

practice, therefore, to store the content of the Edit Buffer as

a User kit whenever you are happy with it.

■ Saving & Loading Data Files

All of the above-mentioned items of data that can be stored

in the instrument’s internal memory can also be saved as

ﬁles on a USB storage device. Whenever needed, further-

more, these memory ﬁles can be loaded back into the

instrument from the storage device. For more details, refer

to the description of the UTILITY setting area’s FILE sec-

tion (UTIL7).

Kit being edited

(User or Preset)

Edit buffer (containing

all modiﬁcations)

[STORE] button

lights up.

If the DTX-MULTI 12 is

turned off without stor-

ing the kit, all modiﬁca-

tions will be lost.

When the kit is stored,

the version in permanent

memory is updated with

all modiﬁcations.

[STORE] button

goes out.

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Internal Design

Owner’s Manual

■

Makeup of Internal Memory

The following diagram shows the correlation between the various functions that can be used to create data on the DTX-

MULTI 12, the data in the instrument’s internal memory, and the data on a USB memory device.

Internal memory

UTIL7

FILE

Data-creating functions

Preset data (ROM)

• Kits

•Voices

•Patterns

•Trigger setups

• User kits

External USB memory device

User memory

Flash ROM

• User trigger

setups

• Utility setting

•Waves

• User

patterns

File extension: .MTK

(ﬁle type = “AllKit”)

All combined

File extension: .MTA

(ﬁle type = “All”)

File extension: .MTT

(ﬁle type = “AllTrigger”)

File extension: .MTU

(ﬁle type = “Utility”)

File extension: .MTW

(ﬁle type = “AllWave”)

File extension: .MTP

(ﬁle type = “AllPattern”)

Audio data (.WAV or .AIFF)

Standard MIDI ﬁle (.MID)

Import

Record

•Pattern editing

•Wave editing

• Utility setting

•Trigger setting

• Kit editing

Save / Load

Store

Import SMF

(PTN4-7)

•Pattern recording

•Voice setting

• MIDI setting

44 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operations

The following section describes how to perform basic tasks

such as the changing of parameter settings, execution of

jobs, and storing of data.

■ Parameter Setting Areas

Within your DTX-MULTI 12, parameters associated with

speciﬁc functions are conveniently grouped together into

seven different parameter setting areas. These areas may be

accessed using the buttons indicated below.

• KIT setting area: [KIT] button

This area is used to select and edit drum kits.

•VOICE setting area: [VOICE] button

A part of the KIT setting area, this area is used to select

and edit voices.

•MIDI setting area: [MIDI] button

A part of the KIT setting area, this area is used to set

MIDI-related parameters on an individual-kit basis.

•PATTERN setting area: [PTN] button

This area is used to select and edit patterns.

•WAVE setting area: [WAVE] button

This area is used to import and edit waves.

• UTILITY setting area: [UTILITY] button

This area is used to set parameters affecting the overall

system and to manage ﬁles.

• TRIGGER setting area: [SHIFT] + [UTILITY] but-

tons

This area is used to edit trigger setup data.

The button corresponding to each setting area will light up

in green when that area is selected. In the case of the

VOICE and MIDI setting areas, the [KIT] button will also

light up.

■ Navigating between Sections

Each setting area is subdivided into a number of different

sections. The current section is indicated at the left of the

upper row of text using the name (or abbreviation) of the

selected setting area together with the section number. Use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these sections.

Example: UTILITY setting area

UTIL1

≥≥≥≥GENERAL

UTIL2

≥≥≥≥≥CLICK

UTIL3

≥≥≥MASTER≥EQ

UTIL4

≥≥≥≥≥≥PAD

UTIL5

≥≥≥≥≥HI-HAT

UTIL6

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

UTIL7

≥≥≥≥≥≥FILE

UTIL8

≥≥FACTORY≥SET

Name of selected

area (UTILITY) Section number

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Basic Operations

Owner’s Manual 45

■ Navigating between Pages

Each section contains a number of parameter setting pages

that are used to make actual settings. With a section page

displayed, press the lit [ENTER] button to access its

parameter setting pages. (In certain cases, it may not be

possible to access parameter-setting pages from a section

page, and the [ENTER] button will not light up.) Each

parameter-setting page is identiﬁed at the left of the upper

row of text using the name (or abbreviation) of the setting

area, the section number, and the page number (with

hyphens between the numbers). You can use the [B]/[C]

buttons to navigate between parameter setting pages.

In certain cases, a number of additional pages may be

accessed from a parameter setting page using the [ENTER]

button, which will light up whenever this is possible. By

pressing the [EXIT] button, you can move back towards the

top of the current setting area.

■ Moving the Cursor

Whenever a page contains a number of different parame-

ters, you can move the ﬂashing cursor left and right using

the [B]/[C] buttons or between the upper and lower rows

of text using the [D] button. In this way, you can select the

parameter setting to be changed (as described below). If

there are no additional parameters to the left or right on the

current page when you press the [B]/[C] button, the cur-

sor will jump to the next parameter-setting page to the left

or right, respectively. In addition, the [B]/[C] and [D]

buttons will light up whenever they can be pressed to move

to a different parameter on the current page or an adjacent

page.

■ Changing Parameter Settings

By pressing the [-/DEC] or [+/INC] button, you can

increase or decrease the setting of the currently selected

parameter.

•A setting can be decreased in units of 10 by holding down the [SHIFT] but-

ton and pressing the [-/DEC] button or by holding down the [-/DEC] button

and pressing the [+/INC] button.

• Similarly, it can be increased in units of 10 by holding down the [SHIFT] but-

ton and pressing the [+/INC] button or by holding down the [+/INC] button

and pressing the [-/DEC] button.

■ Storing Parameter Settings

Whenever parameter settings have been changed on section

and/or parameter-setting pages, the [STORE] button will

light up to remind you to store your settings. The correct

way to store parameter settings is as follows.

When you have ﬁnished setting parameters in a speciﬁc

setting area, press the [STORE] button to open the Store

Kit page.

Using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons, indicate where

you want your data to be stored.

• The above step is not required when storing settings in the UTILITY

setting area.

Press the [ENTER] button. You will be asked to conﬁrm

that you wish to proceed. If necessary, you can press the

[EXIT] button to return to the previous page without stor-

ing any data.

Press the [ENTER] button to store your data in the DTX-

MULTI 12’s internal memory.

Example: VOICE setting area’s TONE section (VCE3)

VCE3

≥≥≥≥≥≥TONE

VCE3-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Attack=+≥0

VCE3-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Decay=+≥0

VCE3-3≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥Release=+≥0

VCE3-4≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥Fc=+≥0≥≥Q=+≥0

Page number

[ENTER]

[EXIT]

• If you turn off the instrument without storing modiﬁed settings,

these modiﬁcations will lost (i.e., the settings will revert to their

previous state when the instrument is next turned on).

NOTE

KIT≥Store≥to

U001:User≥Kit

Destination for stored data.

NOTE

≥≥≥KIT≥Store

≥Are≥you≥sure?

CAUTION

46 Owner’s Manual

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

This section describes the KIT setting area, which can be accessed using the [KIT] button. Your DTX-MULTI 12 is pre-

loaded with a rich selection of Preset kits (P001 to P050) for immediate use, and you can also create and save up to

200 of your own drum kits as User kits (U001 to U200). Use the KIT setting area to select and edit these drum kits.

Makeup of KIT Setting Area

The KIT setting area is subdivided into eight different sections (KIT1 to KIT8). Use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these sec-

tions. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these pages. In

certain cases, a number of additional pages may be accessed from a parameter setting page, also using the lit [ENTER] button. Furthermore,

you can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

• Be sure to store any settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new kit. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

KIT2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON≥≥≥≥≥

KIT3

≥≥EFFECT≥SEND

KIT4

≥≥≥VARIATION

KIT5

≥≥≥≥≥CHORUS

KIT6

≥≥≥≥≥REVERB

KIT7

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

KIT8≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB≥

Select Kit ......................................................................................................... Page 47

KIT4-1 Variation Type page ............................................................................. Page 48

KIT4-2 Variation Return page.......................................................................... Page 49

KIT4-3 Variation Pan page .............................................................................. Page 49

KIT4-4 Variation to Reverb page .....................................................................Page 49

KIT4-5 Variation to Chorus page .....................................................................Page 49

KIT2-1 Kit Volume page ..................................................................................Page 47

KIT2-2 Kit Selection Tempo page.................................................................... Page 47

KIT2-3 Kit Name page..................................................................................... Page 47

KIT3-1 Chorus Send page ..............................................................................Page 48

KIT3-2 Reverb Send page............................................................................... Page 48

KIT5-1 Chorus Type page ............................................................................... Page 49

KIT5-2 Chorus Return page............................................................................ Page 49

KIT5-3 Chorus Pan page ................................................................................Page 50

KIT5-4 Chorus to Reverb page .......................................................................Page 50

KIT6-1 Reverb Type page................................................................................Page 50

KIT6-2 Reverb Return page ............................................................................ Page 50

KIT6-3 Reverb Pan page................................................................................. Page 50

KIT7-1 Layer Switch page ...............................................................................Page 51

KIT7-2 Mute Switch page................................................................................ Page 51

KIT7-3 Hi-hat Function page ........................................................................... Page 52

KIT7-4 Hi-hat MIDI Channel page................................................................... Page 52

KIT7-5 Hi-hat MIDI Type page......................................................................... Page 52

KIT7-6 Trigger Setup Link page ...................................................................... Page 52

KIT8-1 Copy Pad page.................................................................................... Page 53

KIT8-2 Exchange Pads page ..........................................................................Page 53

KIT8-3 Exchange Kits page ............................................................................Page 54

KIT8-4 Initialize Pad page ............................................................................... Page 54

KIT8-5 Initialize Kit page .................................................................................Page 54

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

Owner’s Manual 47

Select Kit

On the Select Kit page (KIT1) you can select the Preset kit or

User kit you want to play. To access this page, press the [KIT]

button, and if necessary, the [B]/[C] buttons. Before you can

edit pads or voices in the VOICE or MIDI setting areas, the drum

kit in question must be selected on this page.

A Kit category

Use this parameter to specify either the Preset (P) or User (U)

drum-kit category.

B Kit number: Kit name

• If you select a new drum kit while a pattern assigned to one if its pads

is being played, the pattern will stop automatically.

• If you select a new drum kit while a preset voice or wave assigned to

one if its pads is being played, the corresponding sound will be auto-

matically silenced.

• If identical voices are assigned to the same Channel-10 MIDI note

numbers in both the newly selected kit and the previous kit, it is normal

for voices for the corresponding pads to continue to play when the new

drum kit is selected.

• If any of the currently selected drum kit’s pads are set to “Hand” on the

Pad Type page (TRG2-1), the Hand icon ( ) will be displayed on-

screen (see page 101).

Kit Volume, Tempo & Name

In the COMMON section, you can set the volume, tempo, and

name of the currently selected drum kit. With the COMMON

page (KIT2) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its

three parameter-setting pages (KIT2-1 to KIT2-3). You can use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Volume

Use this parameter to set the volume of the entire kit.

• If you change the volume setting for MIDI channel 10 on the MIDI

area’s Volume page (MIDI3-2), the Volume parameter on this page

(KIT2-1) will be automatically set to the same value. The reverse does

not apply, however – in other words, the volume setting on the MIDI

area’s Volume page (MIDI3-2) is not affected by changes made on this

page (KIT2-1).

1 Tempo

Use this parameter to specify the tempo to be set automati-

cally upon selection of the current drum kit. If patterns are

assigned to any of the kit’s pads, they will be played at this

tempo. An “off” setting means that the tempo will not change

automatically when the current kit is selected – in other

words, the tempo of the previously selected kit will be main-

tained.

• If waves are assigned to any of the kit’s pads, the tempo (or speed) at

which they are played will not be affected by the kit’s tempo setting.

From the Kit Name page, you can assign a name to the currently

selected drum kit. With this page displayed, press the [ENTER]

button to open the Kit Name Setting page.

KIT2-3-1 Kit Name Setting page

On the Kit Name Setting page, a name of up to 11 characters in

length can be assigned to the currently selected drum kit. Use the

[B]/[C] buttons to move the ﬂashing cursor to the character

you want to change, and then select a character using the [-/DEC]

and [+/INC] buttons. The following characters can be used in

drum-kit names.

[space]

KIT1

Settings P or U

Settings

With “P” (Preset kit) selected: 001 to 050

With “U” (User kit) selected: 001 to 200

KIT2 COMMON

KIT2-1 Kit Volume page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT1

P001:PercsMaster

NOTE

ˇÁ

KIT2

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON

KIT2-1≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥Volume=118

KIT2-2 Kit Selection Tempo page

Settings off, or 30 to 300

KIT2-3 Kit Name page

NOTE

KIT2-2≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥Tempo=off

NOTE

KIT2-3≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥≥≥≥Name

KIT2-3-1

≥≥[User≥Kit≥≥≥]

Kit name

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}ßå

48 Owner’s Manual

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

Effect Send Levels

In the EFFECT SEND section, you can adjust the degree to which

chorus and reverb effects are applied to the entire drum kit. With

the EFFECT SEND page (KIT3) displayed, press the [ENTER]

button to access its two parameter-setting pages (KIT3-1 and

KIT3-2). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to switch between

these pages.

Using the Chorus Send page, you can adjust the degree to which

the chorus effect is applied to all drum voices in the currently

selected kit. If any of the kit’s individual voices also have a cho-

rus-send level set on the VOICE area’s Chorus Send page (VCE4-

2), chorus will be assigned to them in line with the sum of both

send levels.

1 Chorus send level (ChorusSend)

Use this parameter to set the chorus-send level for the cur-

rently selected drum kit.

• If you change the chorus-send level for MIDI channel 10 on the MIDI

area’s Chorus Send page (MIDI3-6), the ChorusSend parameter on

this page (KIT3-1) will be automatically set to the same value. The

reverse does not apply, however – in other words, the chorus send set-

ting on the MIDI area’s Chorus Send page (MIDI3-6) is not affected by

changes made on this page (KIT3-1).

Using the Reverb Send page, you can adjust the degree to which

the reverb effect is applied to all drum voices in the currently

selected kit. If any of the kit’s individual voices also have a

reverb-send level set on the VOICE area’s Reverb Send page

(VCE4-3), reverb will be assigned to them in line with the sum of

both send levels.

1 Reverb send level (ReverbSend)

Use this parameter to set the reverb-send level for the cur-

rently selected drum kit.

• If you change the reverb-send level for MIDI channel 10 on the MIDI

area’s Reverb Send page (MIDI3-7), the ReverbSend parameter on

this page (KIT3-1) will be automatically set to the same value. The

reverse does not apply, however – in other words, the reverb send set-

ting on the MIDI area’s Reverb Send page (MIDI3-7) is not affected by

changes made on this page (KIT3-2).

Variation Effect Setup

In the VARIATION section, you can select a variation effect,

adjust the degree to which it is applied, and conﬁgure it in a num-

ber of other ways. Variation effects are applied to all voices (on all

MIDI channels). With the VARIATION page (KIT4) displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to access its ﬁve parameter-setting

pages (KIT4-1 to KIT4-5). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to

navigate between these pages.

1 Variation category

Use this parameter to select a variation-effect category.

B Variation type

Use this parameter to select a variation-effect type.

With an effect category and type selected, you can press the

[ENTER] button on the Variation Type page (KIT4-1) to access a

range of setting pages allowing each of the selected effect’s

parameters to be set. (The number of parameter-setting pages

depends on the effect selected.) Use the [B]/[C] buttons to nav-

igate between these pages.

KIT4-1-1 Parameter setting page (example)

1 Effect parameter

Each parameter setting page contains a different parameter for

the selected variation effect.

KIT3 EFFECT SEND

KIT3-1 Chorus Send page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT3-2 Reverb Send page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT3

≥≥EFFECT≥SEND

KIT3-1≥≥<FXSEND>

≥ChorusSend=≥≥0

NOTE

KIT3-2≥≥<FXSEND>

≥ReverbSend=≥35

NOTE

KIT4 VARIATION

KIT4-1 Variation Type page

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

KIT4

≥≥≥VARIATION

KIT4-1≥≥VarType=

C&E/Compressor

KIT4-1-1≥≥≥<VAR>

LFOSpeed=0.000Hz

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

Owner’s Manual 49

1 Variation return (VarReturn)

Use this parameter to set the level of the return signal from the

variation effect.

1 Variation pan (VarPan)

Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the variation

effect’s return signal.

1 Variation to reverb (VarToRev)

Use this parameter to set the degree to which the output from

the variation effect is sent to the reverb effect.

1 Variation to chorus (VarToCho)

Use this parameter to set the degree to which the output from

the variation effect is sent to the chorus effect.

Chorus Effect Setup

In the CHORUS section, you can select a chorus effect and con-

ﬁgure it in a range of different ways. Chorus effects are applied to

all voices (on all MIDI channels). With the CHORUS page

(KIT5) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its four

parameter-setting pages (KIT5-1 to KIT5-4). You can use the

[B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Chorus type

Use this parameter to select a chorus-effect type.

With a chorus type selected, you can press the [ENTER] button

on the Chorus Type page (KIT5-1) to access a range of setting

pages allowing each of its parameters to be set. (The number of

parameter-setting pages depends on the type selected.) Use the

[B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

KIT5-1-1 Parameter setting page (example)

1 Effect parameter

Each parameter setting page contains a different parameter for

the selected chorus type.

1 Chorus return (ChoReturn)

Use this parameter to set the level of the return signal from the

chorus effect.

KIT4-2 Variation Return page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT4-3 Variation Pan page

Settings L63 to C to R63

KIT4-4 Variation to Reverb page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT4-5 Variation to Chorus page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT4-2≥≥≥≥≥<VAR>

≥VarReturn=≥64

KIT4-3≥≥≥≥≥<VAR>

≥≥≥VarPan=≥C

KIT4-4≥≥≥≥≥<VAR>

≥≥VarToRev=≥≥0

KIT4-5≥≥≥≥≥<VAR>

≥≥VarToCho=≥≥0

KIT5 CHORUS

KIT5-1 Chorus Type page

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

KIT5-2 Chorus Return page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT5

≥≥≥≥≥CHORUS

KIT5-1≥≥ChoType=

G≥Chorus

KIT5-1-1≥≥≥<CHO>

LFOSpeed=0.000Hz

KIT5-2≥≥≥≥≥<CHO>

≥ChoReturn=≥64

50 Owner’s Manual

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

1 Chorus pan (ChoPan)

Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the chorus

effect’s return signal.

1 Chorus to reverb (ChoToRev)

Use this parameter to set the degree to which the output from

the chorus effect is sent to the reverb effect.

Reverb Effect Setup

In the REVERB section, you can select a reverb effect and conﬁg-

ure it in a range of different ways. Reverb effects are applied to all

voices (on all MIDI channels). With the REVERB page (KIT6)

displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its three parame-

ter-setting pages (KIT6-1 to KIT6-3). You can use the [B]/[C]

buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Reverb type

Use this parameter to select a reverb-effect type.

With a reverb type selected, you can press the [ENTER] button on

the Reverb Type page (KIT6-1) to access a range of setting pages

allowing each of its parameters to be set. (The number of parame-

ter-setting pages depends on the type selected.) Use the [B]/[C]

buttons to navigate between these pages.

KIT6-1-1 Parameter setting page (example)

1 Effect parameter

Each parameter setting page contains a different parameter for

the selected reverb type.

1 Reverb return (RevReturn)

Use this parameter to set the level of the return signal from the

reverb effect.

1 Reverb pan (RevPan)

Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the reverb

effect’s return signal.

KIT5-3 Chorus Pan page

Settings L63 to C to R63

KIT5-4 Chorus to Reverb page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT6 REVERB

KIT5-3≥≥≥≥≥<CHO>

≥≥≥ChoPan=≥C

KIT5-4≥≥≥≥≥<CHO>

≥≥ChoToRev=≥≥0

KIT6

≥≥≥≥≥REVERB

KIT6-1 Reverb Type page

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

KIT6-2 Reverb Return page

Settings 0 to 127

KIT6-3 Reverb Pan page

Settings L63 to C to R63

KIT6-1≥≥RevType=

R3≥Hall

KIT6-1-1≥≥≥<REV>

RevTime=≥0.0s

KIT6-2≥≥≥≥≥<REV>

≥RevReturn=≥64

KIT6-3≥≥≥≥≥<REV>

≥≥≥RevPan=≥C

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

Owner’s Manual 51

Other Drum Kit Settings

In the OTHER section, you can set parameters related to muting*

and hi-hats, and you can also specify the trigger setup to be used

when the current drum kit is selected. With the OTHER page

(KIT7) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its six

parameter-setting pages (KIT7-1 to KIT7-6). You can use the

[B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

*: Muting

The action of pressing a hand down on a pad in order to change the sound

it produces or to silence it is referred to as “muting”. This technique can

be used to delicately change the sound of a performance, and with the

DTX-MULTI 12, you can setup muting in advance in order to change or

silence sounds when you press a hand down on a pad.

Using the Layer Switch function, you can apply the muting tech-

nique during performances to switch between the four layers that

can be assigned to built-in and external pads.

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the pad to be set.

B Layer switch

Use this parameter to specify whether or not triggered layers

from the pad indicated by 1 are to be switched in response to

muting or operation of a hi-hat controller. For more details

regarding layers, see page 32.

•off ............. Layers will not be switched.

• mute ......... Layers A and B are played when muting is off.

Layers C and D are played when muting is on.

•hh............. Layers A and B are played when the hi-hat is

open.

Layers C and D are played when the hi-hat is

closed.

• The “mute” setting is available only for the twelve built-in pads on your

DTX-MULTI 12.

On the Mute Switch page, you can select a group of pads to be

treated as one in terms of muting in order to silence or change

their sounds during performances.

1 Pad number

• This parameter can be set only for the twelve built-in pads on your

DTX-MULTI 12.

B Mute switch (MuteSw)

Set this parameter to “on” if muting for the pad indicated by

1 is to operate in conjunction with muting for other pads

with the same setting. When pad sensitivity is set for playing

with sticks, we recommend that you set MuteSw to “on” for at

least two pads so that you can use the muting technique with-

out the fear of accidentally striking your hand. As you make

your selections, the numbers in the Pad Indicator will light up

to show which pads have been grouped together for muting.

Example: If MuteSw has been set to “on” for Pads 4, 5, and 6:

• When you strike Pad 4, 5, or 6 while pressing down on

either of the other two pads by hand, the struck pad will

produce a shorter sound.

• When you press down on Pad 4, 5, or 6 by hand while one

or more of these pads are producing a sound as a result of

being struck, the struck pad(s) will be silenced.

• Be sure to press ﬁrmly on a pad when you want to activate the muting

function.

• If you are using the muting technique with the MuteSw parameter (2

above) set to “on” and with “mute” selected on the Layer Switch page

(KIT7-1), the Layer Switch function will be activated.

•A polyphonic aftertouch message with a value of 127 is output when-

ever you press down on a pad with MuteSw set to “on”. Similarly, a

polyphonic aftertouch message with a value of 0 is output whenever

you release the pad. These messages are output for note numbers

assigned to all DTX-MULTI 12 pads, except those for which the mute

switch is not enabled (i.e., MuteSw is set to “off”).

• In cases where pads 4 to 9 are setup for playing by hand on the TRIG-

GER area’s Pad Type page (TRG2-1), muting will be automatically

activated without the need for multiple pads to have MuteSw turned

on. In such a case, the pad with MuteSw turned on can be pressed

and held in order to mute another struck pad. Note, however, that this

type of single-pad muting cannot be activated for the other pads (1 to

3, 10 to 12).

KIT7 OTHER

KIT7-1 Layer Switch page

Settings 01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17

Settings off, mute, or hh

KIT7

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

KIT7-1≥-º¡-

LayerSwitch=off

NOTE

KIT7-2 Mute Switch page

Settings 01 to 12

Settings off or on

KIT7-2≥-º¡-

≥≥≥MuteSw=off

NOTE

52 Owner’s Manual

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

1 Hi-hat function (HH Func)

Use this parameter to specify how a hi-hat controller con-

nected to the HI-HAT CONTROL jack is to function.

• hi-hat ........ The hi-hat controller will function in the stan-

dard way for playing the hi-hat cymbal.

• MIDI......... When you step on the hi-hat controller, a MIDI

message is output in line with the settings made

on the Hi-hat MIDI Channel page (KIT7-4) and

the Hi-hat MIDI Type page (KIT7-5).

• When this parameter is set to “hi-hat” and “on” has been selected on

the Send Hi-hat Controller page (UTIL5-3), Control Change 4 mes-

sages corresponding to the degree to which the hi-hat controller is

depressed will be sent to external MIDI devices on MIDI channel 10.

• When this parameter is set to “MIDI”, MIDI messages are sent regard-

less of the selection made on the Send Hi-hat Controller page (UTIL5-

3).

1 Hi-hat MIDI channel (HH MIDI ch)

If “MIDI” has been selected on the Hi-hat Function page

(KIT7-3), use this parameter to set the MIDI channel for out-

put of MIDI messages generated by the hi-hat controller.

• If “hi-hat” has been selected on the Hi-hat Function page (KIT7-3), this

setting will be displayed as “--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

1 Hi-hat MIDI type (HHMIDIType)

If “MIDI” has been selected on the Hi-hat Function page

(KIT7-3), use this parameter to set the type of MIDI message

generated by the hi-hat controller.

• If “hi-hat” has been selected on the Hi-hat Function page (KIT7-3), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

1 Trigger setup link (TrgSetupLink)

Use this parameter to specify the trigger setup to be used

when the current kit is selected. A trigger setup can be

assigned to each different drum kit. These setups are identi-

ﬁed using a category (P for Preset, U for User) and a number,

and you can move the cursor using the [B]/[C] buttons to

set these individually. Select “off” if the currently selected

drum kit does not need a special trigger setup.

• If TrgSetupLink is set to “off”, the trigger setup selected on the Startup

Tr igger page (UTIL1-5) will be loaded by default whenever the DTX-

MULTI 12 is turned on. (See page 83.) Following this, the trigger setup

can be freely changed on the Select Trigger Setup page (TRG1). (See

page 100.)

KIT7-3 Hi-hat Function page

Settings hi-hat or MIDI

KIT7-4 Hi-hat MIDI Channel page

Settings 1 to 16

KIT7-5 Hi-hat MIDI Type page

Settings

CC01 to CC95 (Control Change), AT (After-

touch), PBup (Pitch bend up), or PBdwn

(Pitch bend down)

KIT7-3≥≥≥<OTHER>

≥HH≥Func=hi-hat

NOTE

KIT7-4≥≥≥<OTHER>

≥HH≥MIDI≥ch=10

NOTE

KIT7-5≥≥≥<OTHER>

HHMIDIType=CC01

NOTE

KIT7-6 Trigger Setup Link page

Settings off, P01 to P05, or U01 to U10

KIT7-6≥≥≥<OTHER>

TrgSetupLink=P01

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

Owner’s Manual 53

Kit Management

In the JOB section, you can perform a range of management tasks

such as copying, swapping, and initializing of kits and pads. With

the JOB page (KIT8) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to

access its ﬁve parameter-setting pages (KIT8-1 to KIT8-5). You

can use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

Operations on the JOB section’s parameter-setting pages are per-

formed as follows.

Make the required setting(s) and press the [ENTER]

button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that you wish to pro-

ceed.

To do so, press the [ENTER] button. Alternatively,

you can press the [EXIT] button to cancel the pro-

cess.

• Use the [STORE] button to open the Store Kit page and save the drum

kit in the DTX-MULTI 12’s internal memory (see page 45). (This is not

necessary when swapping kits on the Exchange Kit page (KIT8-3).)

From the Copy Pad page, you can copy settings from one pad to

another in the currently selected drum kit. With this page dis-

played, press the [ENTER] button to open the Copy Pad Settings

page.

KIT8-1-1 Copy Pad Settings page

1 Pad to be copied

Use this parameter to select the pad whose settings are to be

copied.

B Pad to be replaced

Use this parameter to select the pad whose settings are to be

replaced. Set to “01-12” to copy settings to all of the DTX-

MULTI 12’s built-in pads (i.e., Pad 1 to Pad 12). You can also

set “all” to copy settings to all external pads (13, 13R1, 13R2,

14 to 17, FTSW, HHCL, and HHSP) in addition to all of the

DTX-MULTI 12’s built-in pads.

• All information set for the pad in question and the corresponding layers

(i.e., note numbers) will be copied.

• Certain factors may require that output MIDI note numbers other than

those of the pad being copied are automatically assigned to the layers

of the pad(s) being replaced. You can conﬁrm which output MIDI note

numbers have been set on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2).

From the Exchange Pads page, you can swap settings for a pair of

pads within the currently selected kit. With this page displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to open the Exchange Pads Settings

page.

KIT8-2-1 Exchange Pads Settings page

1 Exchange pad 1

B Exchange pad 2

Use these parameters to select the two pads whose settings are

to be swapped.

KIT8 JOB

KIT8-1 Copy Pad page

KIT8

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB

NOTE

KIT8-1≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥Copy≥Pad

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), or HHSP

(hi-hat splash)

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, 01 to 12, or all

KIT8-2 Exchange Pads page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

KIT8-1-1≥≥<Copy>

≥≥º¡≥≥≥-ß≥≥º™

NOTE

KIT8-2≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥Exchange≥Pad

KIT8-2-1≥<Exchg>

≥≥º¡≥≥≥åß≥≥º™

54 Owner’s Manual

KIT Setting Area (KIT)

From the Exchange Kits page, you can swap settings for a pair of

User kits. With this page displayed, press the [ENTER] button to

open the Exchange Kits Settings page.

KIT8-3-1 Exchange Kits Settings page

1 Exchange kit 1

B Exchange kit 2

Use these parameters to select the two drum kits whose set-

tings are to be swapped.

• Only those settings already stored will be swapped. In addition, if drum

kits are swapped without ﬁrst storing any modiﬁed settings, the

swapped settings will be overwritten with the modiﬁed settings when

the drum kit is subsequently stored.

From the Initialize Pad page, you can initialize individual pads

from the currently selected drum kit. With this page displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to open the Initialize Pad Setting page.

KIT8-4-1 Initialize Pad Setting page

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the pad to be initialized.

Once you have selected a pad, press the [ENTER] button, and

when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to proceed, press the

[ENTER] button once again.

From the Initialize Kit page, you can initialize the drum kit cur-

rently being edited. With the Initialize Kit page displayed, press

the [ENTER] button, and when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to

proceed, press the [ENTER] button once again.

KIT8-3 Exchange Kits page

Settings U001 to U200

KIT8-4 Initialize Pad page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

KIT8-3≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥Exchange≥Kit

KIT8-3-1≥<Exchg>

≥≥U001≥åß≥U002

NOTE

KIT8-4≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥Initialize≥Pad

KIT8-4-1≥

≥≥InitPad=¡£Ω¡

KIT8-5 Initialize Kit page

• When a kit is initialized, all of its parameters will be returned to their

default settings. If you would like to save a copy of the kit before ini-

tialization, perform a Store operation as described on

page 45 to

store the currently selected drum kit as a different User kit.

KIT8-5≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥Initialize≥Kit

CAUTION

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Owner’s Manual 55

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

This section describes the VOICE setting area, which can be accessed using the [VOICE] button. In this area, you can

select and edit the voices (i.e., preset voices, waves, and patterns) assigned to individual pads. For more information

on voices and how they work, see page 31.

Makeup of VOICE Setting Area

The VOICE setting area is subdivided into ﬁve different sections (VCE1 to VCE5). Use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these

sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these pages.

You can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

Changes made in the VOICE setting area affect the voices assigned to pads from the currently selected kit. You should, therefore, always

select the drum kit you want to conﬁgure within the KIT setting area before entering the VOICE setting area. The top-most page within the

VOICE setting area is the Select Voice page (VCE1), and here you can assign voices (i.e., preset voices, waves, and patterns) to individual

pads and layers. On each of the parameter-setting pages within this area, furthermore, you can select the pad and/or layer to be modiﬁed.

Please note that when you store changes made to parameters within the VOICE setting area, the entire drum kit is stored.

• Be sure to store any settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new kit. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

VCE1≥-¡£Ω¡-≥≥≥≥ç

Sn001:OakCustom

VCE2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥≥≥TUNE/OUTPUT≥

VCE3

≥≥≥≥≥≥TONE

VCE4

≥≥EFFECT≥SEND

VCE5

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

Select Voice..................................................................................................... Page 56

VCE4-1 Variation Send page ..........................................................................Page 59

VCE4-2 Chorus Send page ............................................................................ Page 59

VCE4-3 Reverb Send page.............................................................................Page 59

VCE2-1 Voice Tuning page.............................................................................. Page 57

VCE2-2 Voice Volume page ............................................................................ Page 57

VCE2-3 Voice Pan page.................................................................................. Page 57

VCE3-1 Attack Time page...............................................................................Page 58

VCE3-2 Decay Time page............................................................................... Page 58

VCE3-3 Release Time page............................................................................ Page 58

VCE3-4 Filter page.......................................................................................... Page 58

VCE5-1 Mono/Poly page.................................................................................Page 60

VCE5-2 Alternate Group page ........................................................................ Page 60

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

56 Owner’s Manual

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

Select Voice

On the Select Voice page (VCE1), you can select the preset voice,

wave, or pattern that will be played when the speciﬁed pad is

struck. Alternatively, you can select a MIDI note to be played

when a pad is struck, and then assign a voice to that MIDI note

(see page 34). The applicable parameter-setting pages, parame-

ters, and settings in the VOICE area will depend on whether a pad

number or MIDI note number is speciﬁed.

• Certain parameters have no effect when a pattern or a MIDI note number

has been assigned to the pad in question. Their settings will be displayed

as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

Assigning a voice to a pad

If the voice is not a pattern (i.e., eP or eU)

If the voice is a pattern (i.e., eP or eU)

Assigning a voice to a MIDI note number

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the number of the pad or MIDI

note to be set. You can also strike a pad to select it.

•Pad 13 supports three different zones, and therefore, is assigned three

different pad numbers – namely, 13 for the head, 13R1 for rim 1, and

13R2 for rim 2.

•Pads 10 to 12 cannot be selected if “disable” has been set on the Pad

10-12 Switch page (UTIL4-3).

B Layer number

Use this parameter to select the layer to be set. Each pad can

contain up to four layers, each of which can be used to play a

preset voice or wave. For details, see page 32.

• The maximum number of layers that can be set for any pad is 4. To add

a layer, change its setting on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2) from “off”

to a MIDI note number.

C Voice category

Use this parameter to specify the category of voice to be

assigned as a preset voice, preset pattern (eP), user pattern

(eU), or wave.

•Patterns cannot be assigned to MIDI note numbers.

D Voice number: Voice name

Use these parameters to select a preset voice, pattern, or wave

from the category indicated by 3.

E Pattern playback mode

If a pattern has been assigned to the pad, use this parameter to

specify how it will be played.

• .............. Start/stop mode: The pattern will start to play

from the beginning when you strike the pad, and

it will stop the next time you strike it.

• ............ Chase mode: One successive measure will be

played each time you strike the pad.

• ............ Cut-off mode: Only one pattern set to this mode

can play at any time. Whenever a cut-off mode

pattern is triggered, any pattern already playing

in this mode will be automatically stopped.

• The maximum number of patterns that can play simultaneously is four.

• Demo patterns cannot be assigned to pads.

VCE1

VCE1≥-¡£Ω¡-≥≥≥≥ç

Sn001:OakCustom

NOTE

VCE1≥-¡£Ω¡-≥≥≥≥ç

Sn001:OakCustom

3 4

VCE1≥-¡£Ω¡-≥≥≥>~

©U001:EmptyPtn

3 4

VCE1≥≥C#-1/≥13

Sn001:OakCustom

3 4

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), HHSP (hi-

hat splash), C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings

Kk, Sn, Tm, Cv, HH, EP, Cu, Br, In, Jp, Af, Or,

E1, E2, E3, Ml, GM, WV, eP, or eU

Settings Refer to the separate Data List booklet.

Settings , ,

NOTE

>>~~>

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

Owner’s Manual 57

Voice Tuning, Volume & Pan

In the TUNE/OUTPUT section, you can set the tuning, volume,

and stereo panning of individual voices. With the TUNE/OUT-

PUT page (VCE2) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access

its three parameter-setting pages (VCE2-1 to VCE2-3). You can

use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

The parameters presented on the Voice Tuning page will depend

on the type of voice assigned to the pad in question.

Drum sounds and waves (i.e., imported audio ﬁles):

Instrument sounds (i.e., piano, guitar, etc.):

Patterns:

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the number of the pad or MIDI

note to be set.

B Layer number

Use this parameter to select the layer to be set.

C Tuning (Tune)

Use this parameter to adjust the tuning of the assigned voice

in one-cent steps.

• The term “cent” refers to one hundredth of a semitone (i.e., 100 cents

= 1 semitone).

D Note

Use this parameter to set the pitch of the assigned voice as a

MIDI note number.

E Transpose

Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the assigned pattern

in one-semitone steps.

•Patterns triggered using MIDI channels 7 to 11 cannot be transposed.

On the Voice Volume page, you can set the volume of the selected

voice.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Volume

Use this parameter to set the volume of the selected voice.

On the Voice Pan page, you can set the stereo panning of the

selected voice.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Pan

Use this parameter to set the stereo panning of the selected

voice.

VCE2 TUNE/OUTPUT

VCE2-1 Voice Tuning page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), HHSP

(hi-hat splash), C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings -24.00 to +0.0 to +24.00

VCE2

≥≥≥TUNE/OUTPUT

VCE2-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Tune=+≥0.00

1 2

VCE2-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Note=C#-1

1 2

VCE2-1≥-º¡-

≥Transpose=+≥0

NOTE

Settings C-2 to G8

Settings -24 to +0 to +24

VCE2-2 Voice Volume page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0 to 127

VCE2-3 Voice Pan page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings L63 to C to R63

NOTE

VCE2-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Volume=100

1 2

VCE2-3≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥≥Pan=≥C

1 2

58 Owner’s Manual

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

Voice Timbre

In the TONE section, you can adjust the tone (or timbre) of the

preset voice, pattern, or wave assigned to the pad in question.

With the TONE page (VCE3) displayed, press the [ENTER] but-

ton to access its four parameter-setting pages (VCE3-1 to VCE3-

4). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these

pages.

On the Attack Time, Decay Time, and Release Time pages

(VCE3-1 to VCE3-3), you can adjust the envelope of the assigned

voice as shown below.

Parameter 3 from each of the pages is used to adjust a different

part of the envelope. Parameters 1 and 2 below are identical on

all three pages.

Typical Display for Attack Time (VCE3-1)

1 Pad number

B Layer number

Attack Time (VCE3-1)

C Attack time

Use this parameter to set the amount of time it takes after the

pad is struck for the assigned voice to reach its peak level.

Decay Time (VCE3-2)

C Decay time

Use this parameter to set the amount of time it takes the voice

to drop to a steady level after reaching its peak level.

Release Time (VCE3-3)

C Release time

Use this parameter to set the amount of time it takes for the

voice to fade out after sending a MIDI Note Off message.

• MIDI Note Off messages are not sent for pads and layers for which

“off” is selected on the MIDI area’s Receive Key-Off page (MIDI1-5).

Therefore, the release-time setting has no effect in such a case.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Filter cutoff frequency (Fc)

Use this parameter to set a cutoff frequency for the low-pass

ﬁlter. Frequencies above this level will be removed from the

selected voice.

VCE3 TONE

VCE3-1 Attack Time page

VCE3-2 Decay Time page

VCE3-3 Release Time page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), HHSP

(hi-hat splash), C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

VCE3

≥≥≥≥≥≥TONE

Pad is struck

(Note On)

Time

Level

Note Off

Decay time

(VCE3-2)

Release time

(VCE3-3)

Attack time

(VCE3-1)

VCE3-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥Attack=+≥0

1 2

Settings -64 to +0 to +63

VCE3-4 Filter page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 – 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings -64 to +0 to +63

NOTE

VCE3-4≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥Fc=+≥0≥≥Q=+≥0

1 2

3 4

Frequency

(or pitch)

Frequencies that pass

through unaffected

Low-pass ﬁlter

Frequencies

that are cut

Cutoff frequency (Fc)

Volume

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

Owner’s Manual 59

D Resonance (Q)

Use this parameter to change the timbre of the voice by boost-

ing frequencies around the cutoff frequency.

Effect Send Levels

In the EFFECT SEND section, you can adjust the degree to which

the DTX-MULTI 12’s built-in Variation, Chorus, and Reverb

effects are applied to individual voices. With the EFFECT SEND

page (VCE4) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its

three parameter-setting pages (VCE4-1 to VCE4-3). You can use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Variation send level (Var)

Use this parameter to specify how much of the sound pro-

duced by the layer indicated by 2 will be sent to the Variation

effect.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Chorus send level (ChoSend)

Use this parameter to specify how much of the sound pro-

duced by the layer indicated by 2 will be sent to the Chorus

effect.

• The chorus send level for the entire kit can be adjusted on the KIT

area’s Chorus Send page (KIT3-1).

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Reverb send level (RevSend)

Use this parameter to specify how much of the sound pro-

duced by the layer indicated by 2 will be sent to the Reverb

effect.

• The reverb send level for the entire kit can be adjusted on the KIT

area’s Reverb Send page (KIT3-2).

Settings -64 to +0 to +63

VCE4 EFFECT SEND

VCE4-1 Variation Send page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0 to 127

Resonance (Q)

Frequency

Cutoff frequency

Level

VCE4

≥≥EFFECT≥SEND

VCE4-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

Var=127(Dry=≥≥0)

1 2

VCE4-2 Chorus Send page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0 to 127

VCE4-3 Reverb Send page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0 to 127

VCE4-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥ChoSend=127

1 2

NOTE

VCE4-3≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥≥RevSend=≥50

1 2

NOTE

60 Owner’s Manual

VOICE Setting Area (VCE)

Other Voice-Related Settings

With the OTHER page (VCE5) displayed, press the [ENTER]

button to access its two parameter-setting pages (VCE5-1 and

VCE5-2). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to switch between

these pages.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Mono/Poly

Use this parameter to specify how overlapping sounds from

the same pad or layer will be treated.

• mono......... When two overlapping sounds are produced by

striking the same pad, the latter sound is given

priority and the earlier sound is silenced.

• poly........... No such restriction is applied and all overlap-

ping sounds are output.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Alternate group (AltGroup)

Using this parameter, you can assign voices to alternate

groups (i.e., monophonic sets of pads, only one of which can

be producing a sound at any time). If you do not want various

individual voices to be played together, they should be

assigned to the same alternate group. Whenever voices from

the same alternate group are triggered by playing the instru-

ment, the latter voice is given priority and the earlier sound is

silenced. Set this parameter to “off” if you do not want to

assign an alternate group.

• The “hhOpen” and “hhClose” alternate groups operate in a special

way: If a voice from the “hhClose” group is triggered after a voice from

the “hhOpen” group, the hhOpen voice is silenced and only the

hhClose voice is played. No silencing of the earlier sound is performed

for any other triggering sequence (for example, hhOpen followed by

hhOpen; hhClose followed by hhOpen; or hhClose followed by

hhClose).

VCE5 OTHER

VCE5-1 Mono/Poly page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings mono or poly

VCE5

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

VCE5-1≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

≥Mono/Poly=poly

1 2

VCE5-2 Alternate Group page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, HHSP, C#-1, or D-1 to A#5

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings off, hhOpen, hhClose, or 1 to 124

1 2

VCE5-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥≥ç

AltGroup=≥≥≥≥off

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Owner’s Manual 61

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

This section describes the MIDI setting area, which can be accessed using the [MIDI] button. In this area, you can set

MIDI-related parameters on an individual-kit basis. In addition, layer settings for each pad (i.e., the number of layers

and the way in which they play) are also conﬁgured within the MIDI setting area. For more information on the functions

setup using this setting area, see page 34.

Structure of MIDI Setting Area

The MIDI setting area is subdivided into three different sections (MIDI1 to MIDI3). Use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these

sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these pages.

You can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area. MIDI parameters set within this area are stored on an

individual-kit basis; therefore, you should always select the drum kit you want to conﬁgure within the KIT setting area before entering the

MIDI setting area. Parameters within the MIDI MESSAGE section (MIDI1) affect individual pads, which can be selected on-screen or by

striking them. Meanwhile, parameters within the TG/MIDI SWITCH section (MIDI2) and the OTHER section (MIDI3) affect individual

MIDI channels, which can be selected on-screen.

• Be sure to store any settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new kit. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=note

MIDI2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥TG/MIDI≥SWITCH

MIDI3≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

The parameter-setting pages that make up the MIDI MESSAGE section will depend

on the type of MIDI message selected on the Select Message Type page (MIDI1).

• Pages when MessageType is set to “note”:

MIDI1-1 Playing Mode page............................................................................Page 62

MIDI1-2 MIDI Note page .................................................................................Page 63

MIDI1-3 MIDI Channel page ...........................................................................Page 63

MIDI1-4 Gate Time page.................................................................................Page 64

MIDI1-5 Receive Key-Off page .......................................................................Page 64

MIDI1-6 Velocity Limits page........................................................................... Page 64

MIDI1-7 Trigger Velocity page .........................................................................Page 64

MIDI1-8 Trigger Polyphony page..................................................................... Page 65

MIDI1-9 Trigger Alternate Group page ............................................................ Page 65

• Pages when MessageType is set to “CC”:

MIDI1-1 Control Change Number & Value page ............................................. Page 65

MIDI1-2 MIDI Channel page ...........................................................................Page 65

• Pages when MessageType is set to “PC”:

MIDI1-1 Program Change page ...................................................................... Page 66

MIDI1-2 MIDI Channel page ...........................................................................Page 66

• No pages are accessible when MessageType is set to

“strt”, “cont”, or “stop”.

MIDI3-1 Transmit page .................................................................................... Page 67

MIDI3-2 Volume page...................................................................................... Page 67

MIDI3-3 Pan page ........................................................................................... Page 67

MIDI3-4 Program Change page ...................................................................... Page 67

MIDI3-5 Variation Send Level page................................................................. Page 68

MIDI3-6 Chorus Send Level page................................................................... Page 68

MIDI3-7 Reverb Send Level page ................................................................... Page 68

MIDI3-8 CC Number & Value page ................................................................. Page 68

MIDI2-1 Tone Generator Switch page .............................................................Page 66

MIDI2-2 External MIDI Switch page................................................................Page 66

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

62 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

Select Message Type

When you press the [MIDI] button, a page for selecting a MIDI

message type (MIDI1) will be displayed. On this page, you can

select the type of MIDI message to be assigned to each pad.

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the pad to be set. You can also

strike a pad to select it.

B Message type

Use this parameter to set the type of MIDI message that will

be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1 is struck.

• note........... A MIDI note will be sent. Use this setting if you

want to produce a sound whenever you strike the

pad.

•CC............ A Control Change message will be sent.

•PC............. A Program Change message will be sent.

• strt............. A SysEx FA Start command will be sent.

• cont........... A SysEx FB Continue command will be sent.

• stop ........... A SysEx FC Stop command will be sent.

• “note” type messages are sent simultaneously to the DTX-MULTI 12’s

internal tone generator and to connected external MIDI devices.

• Message types other than “note” are sent only to connected external

MIDI devices.

The parameter-setting pages that can be accessed

within the MIDI1 section will depend on the type of

MIDI message selected.

•Parameter-setting pages for “note” messages are

explained on this page.

•Parameter-setting pages for “CC” messages are

explained on page 65.

•Parameter-setting pages for “PC” messages are

explained on page 66.

1 Pad number

B Playing mode

Use this parameter to set Stack, Alternate, or Hold as the play-

ing mode for the pad indicated by 1. Some typical applica-

tions of these modes are explained on the following page.

• stack ......... When Stack mode is selected, all notes assigned

to the pad are triggered simultaneously. For

example, you can use this mode to produce

chords or to trigger multiple preset voices or

waves with a single strike. To produce just one

sound, select this mode and assign only one

voice to the pad.

• alternate.... When Alternate mode is selected, the notes

assigned to the pad are played individually in

turn each time it is struck. For example, you can

use this mode to produce a different sound each

time you strike the pad.

• hold .......... When Hold mode is selected, the notes assigned

to the pad are alternately turned on and off each

time it is struck. If, for example, a sustained

sound has been assigned, the ﬁrst strike of the

pad will turn it on, the next strike will turn it off,

and so on.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

MIDI1

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), or HHSP

(hi-hat splash)

Settings note, CC, PC, strt, cont, or stop

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=note

NOTE

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=note

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=CC

MIDI1≥-º¡-

MessageType=PC

Parameter-Setting Pages for

“note” Messages

MIDI1-1 Playing Mode page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings stack, alternate, or hold

MIDI1-1≥-º¡-

≥Mode=alternate

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

Owner’s Manual 63

1 Pad number

B Layer number

Use this parameter to select the layer you want to set.

C Note

Use this parameter to select a MIDI note to be sent by the

layer indicated by 2. You can also choose either of the fol-

lowing two special settings.

•off..............Regardless of the setting made on the Playing

Mode page (MIDI1-1), no MIDI note will be

sent when the pad is struck.

• skip............If “alternate” has been selected on the Playing

Mode page (MIDI1-1), this layer will be

skipped. In other words, no MIDI note will be

sent when it is this layer’s turn to play. Alterna-

tively, if “stack” or “hold” has been set on the

Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), this setting has

the same effect as “off” above (i.e., no MIDI

note will be sent for this layer).

• Notes outside the range covered by General MIDI are displayed in

parentheses – for example, “(C#-2/1)”.

• Notes on MIDI channel 10 having already been assigned to a layer will

be displayed with an asterisk in front of them – for example, “*C3”. If

you change the note setting for a pad indicated in this way, the note

setting for the other pad will also be changed in the same way .

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C MIDI channel (MIDI Ch)

Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel for MIDI notes

sent for the layer indicated by 2.

• If no note number has been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

Typical Uses of Stack, Alternate, and

Hold Modes

Using the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), you can select the

way in which a pad’s four layers will be played. For example,

pads can be setup to produce a chord by playing multiple lay-

ers at the same time or to play a different layer on each succes-

sive strike. The following are typical examples of how these

modes can be used.

● Playing just one sound when a pad is struck

Select “stack” on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), and

assign a MIDI note to Layer A only on the MIDI Note

page (MIDI1-2).

●

Playing two sounds simultaneously when a pad is struck

Select “stack” on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), and

assign a different MIDI note to both Layer A and Layer B

on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2).

●

Playing two sounds alternately each time a pad is struck

Select “alternate” on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1),

and assign a different MIDI note to Layers A and B on the

MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2).

● Playing Layer A, then silencing it, playing Layer C, then

silencing it, playing Layer A… and so on each time a

pad is struck

Select “alternate” on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1),

and assign a MIDI note or “skip” to Layers A through D

on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2) as follows.

● Playing three held sounds simultaneously when a pad

is struck, and silencing them the next time it is struck

Select “hold” on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), and

assign MIDI notes to Layers A through C on the MIDI

Note page (MIDI1-2) as follows. In addition, select “on”

for Layers A through C on the Receive Key-Off page

(MIDI1-5).

• If a note on MIDI channel 10 is assigned, be sure to select “on” for

Layers A through C on the Receive Key-Off page (MIDI1-5).

Layer Note number

AD1

B off

C off

D off

Layer Note number

AD1

BE2

C off

D off

Layer Note number

AD1

BE2

C off

D off

Layer Note number

AD1

B skip

CE2

D skip

Layer Note number

AC3

BE3

CG3

D off

NOTE

MIDI1-2 MIDI Note page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings off, C#-2/1 to F#8/126, or skip

MIDI1-3 MIDI Channel page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 1 to 16

MIDI1-2≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

Note=*≥C#-1/≥13

1 2

NOTE

MIDI1-3≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

≥≥≥MIDI≥Ch=10

1 2

NOTE

64 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Gate time

Use this parameter to set a gate time for MIDI notes sent for

the layer indicated by 2. A MIDI Note On message is sent

when a pad is struck, and the corresponding Note Off mes-

sage is sent a short time later. The duration between sending

of these signals is referred to as the “gate time”, and by

adjusting this setting, you can control the duration of MIDI

notes.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• If “hold” has been selected on the Playing Mode page (MIDI1-1), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• MIDI Note Off signals are not sent for pads set to “off” on the Receive

Key-Off page (MIDI1-5). If you want to set a gate time, therefore, be

sure to set RcvKeyOff to “on”.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Receive key-off (RcvKeyOff)

Use this parameter to set whether or not MIDI Note Off mes-

sages will be sent for the layer indicated by 2. Most drum

voices are one-shot sounds that decay over time until they

become silent; therefore, MIDI Note Off messages are not

needed to stop them. As such, this parameter should normally

be set to “off”. If, however, a non-decaying sound is assigned

to a pad or layer, you can ensure that the required MIDI Note

Off message is sent by setting this parameter to “on”. In addi-

tion, you can adjust the amount of time that passes between

striking of the pad and sending MIDI Note Off messages

using the Gate Time page (MIDI1-4).

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• Sending of MIDI Note Off messages is automatically turned on when-

ever a MIDI Channel other than 10 has been selected on the MIDI

Channel page (MIDI1-3). In such a case, therefore, this setting will be

displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

1 Pad number

B Layer number

C Velocity lower limit

D Velocity upper limit

Use these parameters to set the range of velocities that will

cause the layer indicated by 2 to send a MIDI note message.

The term “velocity” refers to the speed (or power) with which

a pad is struck. By setting upper and lower limits using these

parameters, you can prevent sounds from being produced

when the pad is struck too hard or too soft.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), these settings will be displayed

as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

1 Pad number

B Trigger velocity (TrgVel)

Use this parameter to control the velocity value of MIDI notes

to be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1 is struck.

•variable..... MIDI velocity values will reﬂect the strength

with which the pad is struck.

•1 – 127...... MIDI notes are sent with this ﬁxed velocity

value, regardless of how hard or soft the pad is

struck.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• No sound will be produced if TrgVel 2 is set to a value outside the lim-

its set on the Velocity Limits page (MIDI1-6).

MIDI1-4 Gate Time page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0.0s to 9.9s

MIDI1-5 Receive Key-Off page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings off or on

MIDI1-4≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

≥GateTime=0.0s

1 2

NOTE

MIDI1-5≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

≥RcvKeyOff=off

1 2

MIDI1-6 Velocity Limits page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings A, B, C, or D

Settings 0 to 127

MIDI1-7 Trigger Velocity page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings variable or 1 to 127

NOTE

MIDI1-6≥-º¡-≥≥≥ç

VelLimit=≥≥0-127

3 4

1 2

NOTE

MIDI1-7≥-º¡-≥≥≥

TrgVel=variable

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

Owner’s Manual 65

1 Pad number

B Trigger mono/poly (TrgMonoPoly)

Use this parameter to control what happens when the pad

indicated by 1 is struck repeatedly.

• mono ........ The previous sound will be stopped before a

new sound starts.

• poly .......... Previous sounds will continue to play when a

new sound starts.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• MIDI Note Off messages are not sent when “off” has been selected on

the Receive Key-Off page (MIDI1-5). If you want to set trigger monoph-

ony, therefore, be sure to set this parameter to “on”. This will ensure

that Note Off messages are sent to prevent overlapping voices.

1 Pad number

B Trigger alternate group (TrgAltGrp)

Use this parameter to assign the pad indicated by 1 to an

alternate group if so required. Alternate groups are monopho-

nic sets of pads, and therefore, only one pad from an alternate

group can be producing a sound at any time. If a pad is struck

while another pad from the same alternate group is already

producing a sound, a MIDI Note Off message will be sent for

the ﬁrst pad together with the MIDI Note On message for the

second. In order to use trigger alternate groups with voices

played on MIDI channel 10, the sending of MIDI Note Off

messages must be enabled by selecting “on” for RcvKeyOff

on the Receive Key-Off page (MIDI1-5). Up to 32 trigger

alternate groups can be setup on your DTX-MULTI 12. If

there is no need for a pad to be assigned to a trigger alternate

group, you can set this parameter to “off”.

• If no note numbers have been assigned to any of the pad’s layers (A to

D) on the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2), this setting will be displayed as “-

--” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

• MIDI Note Off messages are not sent when “off” has been set on the

Receive Key-Off page (MIDI1-5). If you want to use trigger alternate

groups, therefore, be sure to set this parameter to “on”. This will ensure

that Note Off messages are sent to prevent overlapping voices.

1 Pad number

B Control change number (CCNo)

Use this parameter to set the type of MIDI Control Change

message to be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1 is

struck.

C Control change value (Val)

Use this parameter to set a value for the MIDI Control Change

message to be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1 is

struck.

•VARI .........The control change value will depend on how

hard the pad is struck.

•0 – 127 ......Control change messages are sent with this ﬁxed

value, regardless of how hard or soft the pad is

struck.

• Before setting Val 3 to “VARI”, it will be necessary to access the Trig-

ger Velocity page (MIDI1-7) with Message Type=note (MIDI1) and to

set the TrgVel parameter to “variable”.

1 Pad number

B MIDI channel (MIDI Ch)

Use this parameter to set a MIDI channel for the Control

Change messages to be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1

is struck.

MIDI1-8 Trigger Polyphony page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings mono or poly

MIDI1-9 Trigger Alternate Group page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings off or 1 to 32

MIDI1-8≥-º¡-

TrgMonoPoly=poly

NOTE

MIDI1-9≥-º¡-≥≥

TrgAltGrp=off

NOTE

Parameter-Setting Pages for

“CC” Messages

MIDI1-1 Control Change Number &

Value page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings 1 to 95

Settings VARI or 0 to 127

MIDI1-2 MIDI Channel page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings 1 to 16

MIDI1-1≥-º¡-

CCNo=≥7/Val=VARI

NOTE

MIDI1-2≥-º¡-

≥≥≥MIDI≥Ch=10

66 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

1 Pad number

B Bank select MSB (M)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select MSB value to be sent

whenever the pad indicated by 1 is struck.

C Bank select LSB (L)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select LSB value to be sent

whenever the pad indicated by 1 is struck.

D Program change (PC)

Use this parameter to set a program-change number to be sent

whenever the pad indicated by 1 is struck.

1 Pad number

B MIDI channel (MIDI Ch)

Use this parameter to set the MIDI channel for the program-

change messages to be sent whenever the pad indicated by 1

is struck.

MIDI Destination Switches

With the TG/MIDI SWITCH page (MIDI2) displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to access its two parameter-setting pages

(MIDI2-1, MIDI2-2). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to switch

between these pages.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

Use this parameter to select the MIDI channel (1 to 16) to be

set.

B Tone generator switch (TGSwitch)

Use this parameter to indicate whether MIDI messages pro-

duced by playing pads and changing drum kits should be sent

to the internal tone generator. (Choose “on” to send to the

tone generator.)

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

Use this parameter to select the MIDI channel (1 to 16) to be

set.

B External MIDI switch (MIDI Switch)

Use this parameter to indicate whether MIDI messages pro-

duced by playing pads and changing drum kits should be sent

to an external tone generator via the MIDI OUT connector on

the rear panel or the USB TO HOST port on the side panel.

(Choose “on” to send the messages.)

Parameter-Setting Pages for

“PC” Messages

MIDI1-1 Program Change page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings 000 to 127

Settings 001 to 128

MIDI1-2 MIDI Channel page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW,

HHCL, or HHSP

Settings 1 to 16

MIDI1-1≥-º¡-

M000/L000/PC001

32 4

MIDI1-2≥-º¡-

≥≥≥MIDI≥Ch=10

MIDI2 TG/MIDI SWITCH

MIDI2-1 Tone Generator Switch page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings off or on

MIDI2-2 External MIDI Switch page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings off or on

MIDI2

≥TG/MIDI≥SWITCH

MIDI2-1≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥TG≥Switch=off

MIDI2-2≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

MIDI≥Switch=off

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

Owner’s Manual

Other MIDI Settings

In the OTHER section, you can set various MIDI messages to be

sent whenever the current kit is selected. With the OTHER page

(MIDI3) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its eight

parameter-setting pages (MIDI3-1 through MIDI3-8). You can

use the [

]/[

] buttons to navigate between these pages.

MIDI channel (Ch)

Use this parameter to select the MIDI channel (1 to 16) to be

set.

Transmit

Use this parameter to indicate which MIDI messages are to be

sent whenever the current kit is selected.

•off ............. No MIDI messages will be sent.

• all ............. All applicable MIDI messages will be sent. (See

the following parameter-setting page descrip-

tions for more details.)

•PC............. Only program change messages and bank-select

MSB/LSB messages will be sent.

MIDI channel (Ch)

Volume

Use this parameter to set a volume value to be sent whenever

the current kit is selected.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the Transmit page (MIDI3-1), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

MIDI channel (Ch)

Pan

Use this parameter to set the pan value to be sent whenever

the current kit is selected.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the Transmit page (MIDI3-1), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

MIDI channel (Ch)

Bank select MSB (M)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select MSB value to be sent

whenever the current kit is selected.

Bank select LSB (L)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select LSB value to be sent

whenever the current kit is selected.

Program change (PC)

Use this parameter to set a program-change number to be sent

whenever the current kit is selected.

• If “off” has been selected on the Transmit page (MIDI3-1), these set-

tings will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

MIDI3 OTHER

MIDI3-1

Transmit page

Settings

1 to 16

Settings

off, all, or PC

MIDI3-2

Volume page

Settings

1 to 16

Settings

0 to 127

MIDI3

≥≥≥≥≥OTHER

MIDI3-1≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥Transmit=all

MIDI3-2≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥≥Volume=100

NOTE

MIDI3-3

Pan page

Settings

1 to 16

Settings

L63 to C to R63

MIDI3-4

Program Change page

Settings

1 to 16

Settings

000 to 127

Settings

000 to 127

Settings

001 to 128

MIDI3-3≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥≥≥Pan=≥C

NOTE

MIDI3-4≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

M000/L000/PC001

32 4

NOTE

68 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Setting Area (MIDI)

On the Variation Send Level, Chorus Send Level, and Reverb

Send Level pages, you can adjust the send level to be set for each

of the corresponding effect units when the current kit is selected.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the Transmit page (MIDI3-1), theses

settings will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

Parameter 2 from each of the pages is used to adjust the corre-

sponding send level. Parameter 1 is identical on all three pages.

[Setting example using the Variation Send Level

page (MIDI3-5)]

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

[MIDI3-5 Variation Send Level page]

B Variation send level (Var)

Use this parameter to set the variation-effect send level to be

sent whenever the current kit is selected.

• If the MIDI channel 1 is set to 10, this setting will be displayed as “---”

and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

[MIDI3-6 Chorus Send Level page]

2 Chorus send level (ChoSend)

Use this parameter to set the chorus send level to be sent

whenever the current kit is selected.

[MIDI3-7 Reverb Send Level page]

2 Reverb send level (RevSend)

Use this parameter to set the reverb send level to be sent

whenever the current kit is selected.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Control change number (CCNo)

Use this parameter to set the type (or number) of MIDI Con-

trol Change message to be sent whenever the current kit is

selected. No control-change messages are sent when “off” is

set.

C Control change value (Val)

Use this parameter to set a value for the MIDI Control Change

messages to be sent whenever the current kit is selected.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the Transmit page (MIDI3-1),

these settings will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be

possible.

• If the type of MIDI Control Change message set on this page (MIDI3-8)

matches one of the control-change message types set on the following

pages, this page’s setting will have priority: Volume (MIDI3-2), Pan

(MIDI3-3), Variation Send Level (MIDI3-5), Chorus Send Level (MIDI3-

6), or Reverb Send Level (MIDI3-7).

MIDI3-5 Variation Send Level page

MIDI3-6 Chorus Send Level page

MIDI3-7 Reverb Send Level page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 0 to 127

NOTE

MIDI3-5≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

Var=≥≥0(Dry=127)

NOTE

MIDI3-8 CC Number & Value page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings off or 1 to 95

Settings 0 to 127

MIDI3-8≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

CCNo=off/Val=≥≥0

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Owner’s Manual 69

WAVE Setting Area (WAVE)

This section describes the WAVE setting area, which can be accessed using the [WAVE] button. Your DTX-MULTI 12

can be used to import AIF and WAV audio ﬁles from a wide range of sources. These ﬁles (referred to as “waves”) can

then be used in the same way as the instrument’s preset voices and patterns. The WAVE setting area is used to import

and edit waves.

Makeup of WAVE Setting Area

The following four sections (WAVE1 to WAVE4) make up the WAVE setting area. Use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these

sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these pages.

In certain cases, a number of additional pages may be accessed from a parameter setting page, also using the lit [ENTER] button. Further-

more, you can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

• Be sure to store any imported waves or settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new wave. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

WAVE1

WV001:EmptyWave

WAVE2

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON

WAVE3

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB

WAVE4

≥≥MEMORY≥INFO

Wave Selection & Playback............................................................................. Page 70

WAVE4-1 Memory Info page...........................................................................Page 73

WAVE2-1 Wave Playback Mode page............................................................. Page 70

WAVE2-2 Trimming page ................................................................................Page 71

WAVE2-3 Wave Name page ...........................................................................Page 71

WAVE3-1 Import All page ...............................................................................Page 72

WAVE3-2 Normalize page............................................................................... Page 73

WAVE3-3 Delete page ....................................................................................Page 73

WAVE3-4 Delete All page ...............................................................................Page 73

WAVE3-5 Optimize Memory page................................................................... Page 73

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

70 Owner’s Manual

WAVE Setting Area (WAVE)

Wave Selection & Playback

You can use the Select Wave page (WAVE1) to select and play

waves. Only waves that have been saved in the DTX-MULTI 12’s

internal memory by importing (see page 72) will be available for

selection on this page. In other words, audio ﬁles stored on a USB

memory device are not immediately made available for selection

simply by plugging in the device.

On the Select Wave page, you can preview the currently selected

wave by pressing and holding the [WAVE] button. Release the

button to stop playback.

A Wave number: Wave name

Playback Mode, Trim Points & Name

In the COMMON section, you can choose a playback mode for

the currently selected wave and perform other related operations

such as trimming and naming. With the COMMON page

(WAVE2) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its three

parameter-setting pages (WAVE2-1 to WAVE2-3). You can use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

• If the selected wave contains no data, the [ENTER] button will not open

parameter-setting pages.

1 Playback mode (PlayMode)

Use this parameter to set the way in which the selected wave

will be played when assigned to a pad. For details on editing

start, end, and loop points, see the description of the Trim-

ming page (WAVE2-2) below.

• oneshot ..... The wave will be played once only from the start

point to the end point. This mode is normally

selected for drums, special effects, and other

non-looped sounds.

• loop .......... The wave will be played continuously, ﬁrst from

the start point to the end point, and then repeat-

edly from the loop point to the end point.

WAVE1

Settings WV001 to WV500

WAVE2

WAVE1

WV001:My≥Wave

WAVE2

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON

NOTE

WAVE2-1 Wave Playback Mode page

Settings oneshot or loop

WAVE2-1≥<COMMON>

PlayMode=oneshot

Start point End point

One-shot playback

Start point End point

Looped playback

Loop point

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

WAVE Setting Area (WAVE)

Owner’s Manual 71

From the Trimming page, you can edit the currently selected

wave’s start, end, and loop points. With the Trimming page

(WAVE2-2) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to open the

Trimming Settings page.

WAVE2-2-1 Trimming Settings page

1 Trim point

Use this parameter to select the trim point to be set. As shown

in the diagram below, three different types of trim point can

be selected – start, loop, and end.

• Start........This is the position at which playback will start.

In other words, no data in front of this point (i.e.,

with a smaller position value) will be played.

• Loop .......This is the position at which looping will start. If

“loop” has been selected on the Wave Playback

Mode page (WAVE2-1), playback will loop con-

tinuously between this point and the end point.

• End .........This is the position at which playback will end. In

other words, no data behind this point (i.e., with a

larger position value) will be played.

B Point

Use this parameter to specify a ﬁve-digit position value for

the selected trim point. The [B]/[C] buttons can be used to

move the cursor between digits, and the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons can be used to change the corresponding value.

•To audition your wave with the current settings, press the [WAVE] but-

ton with the Trimming Settings page displayed.

From the Wave Name page, you can assign a name to the cur-

rently selected wave. With this page displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to open the Wave Name Setting page.

WAVE2-3-1 Wave Name Setting page

On the Wave Name Setting page, you can set a wave name of

up to 10 characters in length. Use the [B]/[C] buttons to

move the ﬂashing cursor to the character you want to change,

and then select a new character using the [-/DEC] and [+/

INC] buttons. The following characters can be used in wave

names.

[space]

Other Wave-Related Tasks

In the JOB section, you can create waves by importing WAV or

AIFF ﬁles from a USB memory device into the DTX-MULTI 12’s

internal memory, and you can also perform a number of other

related tasks. With the JOB page (WAVE3) displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to access its ﬁve parameter-setting pages

(WAVE3-1 to WAVE3-5). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to

navigate between these pages.

Whenever you press the [ENTER] button to perform an operation

on a JOB section page, you will be asked to reconﬁrm that you

want to do so. Press the [ENTER] button once again to proceed.

WAVE2-2 Trimming page

Settings start, loop, or end

Settings From 00000

WAVE2-2≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥≥Trimming

WAVE2-2-1≥≥start

≥≥Point=05000

Start point End point

Looped playback

Loop point

NOTE

WAVE2-3 Wave Name page

WAVE3 JOB

WAVE2-3≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥≥≥≥Name

WAVE2-3-1

≥≥[MyWave≥1≥]

Wave name

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}ßå

WAVE3

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB

≥≥≥Normalize

≥Are≥you≥sure?

72 Owner’s Manual

WAVE Setting Area (WAVE)

Using the Import All page, you can import all WAV or AIFF ﬁles

from a USB memory device into your DTX-MULTI 12’s internal

memory.

• Files can also be imported individually, and the procedure for doing so is

described on the right.

• Only WAV and AIFF audio ﬁles can be imported.

Ensure that the WAV or AIFF ﬁles to be imported are

located in the USB memory device’s root directory,

using a computer to move them if necessary.

Plug the USB memory device into the instrument’s

USB TO DEVICE port.

With the JOB page (WAVE3) displayed, press the

[ENTER] button, and if necessary, the [B]/[C] but-

tons to open the Import All page (WAVE3-1).

Press the [ENTER] button once again.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that you want to import all ﬁles.

You can press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous page

without importing.

Press the [ENTER] button to import.

Each imported wave will be automatically assigned a wave

number.

You can press the [EXIT] button at any time during the import

process to terminate it. Files that have been fully imported at

that time will be retained in the DTX-MULTI 12’s internal

memory.

• If there is insufﬁcient free space in the instrument’s internal memory,

the message “Wave memory full.” will be displayed and the import pro-

cess will be terminated. Before repeating the import process, make

additional memory available by deleting unneeded waves on the

Delete page (WAVE3-3) or the Delete All page (WAVE3-4).

WAVE3-1 Import All page

NOTE

WAVE3-1≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥Import≥All

≥Are≥you≥sure?

Now≥Importing...

[EXIT]≥to≥cancel

NOTE

Importing Individual Audio Files

The following describes how to import individual WAV or

AIFF ﬁles from a USB memory device into the DTX-MULTI

12’s internal memory.

• Only WAV and AIFF audio ﬁles can be imported.

Ensure that the WAV or AIFF ﬁle to be imported is

located in the USB memory device’s root direc-

tory, using a computer to move it if necessary.

Plug the USB memory device into the instru-

ment’s USB TO DEVICE port.

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the

[WAVE] button to open the IMPORT page shown

below.

Use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons to select the

audio ﬁle you want to import.

Press the [ENTER] button to import.

When the selected ﬁle has been imported, the IMPORT

page will allow you to assign it to a pad within the cur-

rently selected kit.

• If there is insufﬁcient free space in the instrument’s internal mem-

ory, the message “Wave memory full.” will be displayed and the

import process will be terminated. Before repeating the import pro-

cess, make additional memory available by deleting unneeded

waves on the Delete page (WAVE3-3) or the Delete All page

(WAVE3-4).

Use the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons to select the

pad to which the wave is to be assigned.

The available options are 01 to 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17,

FTSW, HHCL, and HHSP. You can also select a pad by

striking it. Alternatively, you can select “off” to store the

imported wave in the instrument’s internal memory with-

out assigning it to a pad at this time.

When you have assigned the wave as required,

press the [ENTER] button to complete the proce-

dure.

NOTE

IMPORT

≥≥≥Surdo.WAV

IMPORT

≥≥≥FillX.AIF

Name of audio ﬁle to be imported

NOTE

IMPORT

≥PadAssign=¡£Ω¡

Pad number

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

WAVE Setting Area (WAVE)

Owner’s Manual 73

From the Normalize page, you can increase the volume of the cur-

rently selected wave. With this page displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to open the Ratio page (WAVE3-2-1). Here you

can specify how much the volume of the wave is to be increased.

WAVE3-2-1 Ratio page

1 Ratio

Use this parameter to specify how much the wave’s volume is

to be increased. Generally, a ratio of 100% or lower is used.

With a setting of 100%, the volume will be increased to the

maximum possible level without clipping. (Ratios greater

than 100% can be speciﬁed; however, the wave may become

distorted as a result.)

From the Delete page, you can delete the wave currently selected

on the Select Wave page (WAVE1).

Press the [ENTER] button with the Delete page displayed, and

when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to proceed, press the

[ENTER] button once again.

From the Delete All page, you can delete all waves from the

DTX-MULTI 12’s internal wave memory.

Press the [ENTER] button with the Delete All page displayed, and

when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to proceed, press the

[ENTER] button once again.

From the Optimize Memory page, you can maximize the amount

of unused wave memory. In order to do this, the content of the

DTX-MULTI 12’s internal wave memory is rearranged to make

more memory available. Optimization can be an effective way to

increase the amount of memory available for waves.

Wave Memory Status

The MEMORY INFO section allows you to display the current

usage status of the DTX-MULTI 12’s wave memory. To view the

memory-usage status, navigate to the MEMORY INFO section

(WAVE4) and press the [ENTER] button.

1 Memory usage ratio (%)

This indicates how much of the total wave memory is cur-

rently being used in percentage format.

B Used memory / Total memory

This indicates separately the amount of wave memory used

and the total wave memory in megabyte (MB) units.

• Certain types of audio ﬁle may require more of the instrument’s mem-

ory than indicated by the corresponding ﬁle size shown on your com-

puter.

WAVE3-2 Normalize page

Settings 1 to 800

WAVE3-3 Delete page

WAVE3-4 Delete All page

WAVE3-2≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥Normalize

WAVE3-2-1

≥≥≥Ratio=100%

WAVE3-3≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥≥Delete

WAVE3-4≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥Delete≥All

WAVE3-5

Optimize Memory page

WAVE4 MEMORY INFO

WAVE4-1 Memory Info page

WAVE3-5≥≥≥≥<JOB>

Optimize≥Memory

WAVE4

≥≥MEMORY≥INFO

WAVE4-1≥≥≥≥≥0.0%

≥≥0.4MB≥/≥64.0MB

NOTE

74 Owner’s Manual

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

This section describes the PATTERN setting area, which can be accessed using the [PTN] button. Built into the DTX-

MULTI 12 are a range of Preset patterns specially for playback (P001 to P128) in addition to User patterns that can be

freely recorded and edited (U001 to U050). Use the PATTERN area to record and edit these patterns.

•Parameter setting pages from the COMMON section (PTN2), the MIDI section (PTN3), and the JOB section (PTN4) will not be accessible when a Preset pattern

has been selected. You can, however, edit a Preset pattern by ﬁrst selecting an empty User pattern and then copying the Preset pattern into it using the Copy

Pattern page (PTN4-5).

Makeup of PATTERN Setting Area

The PATTERN setting area is subdivided into ﬁve different sections (PTN1 to PTN5). Use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between

these sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these

pages. In certain cases, a number of additional pages may be accessed from a parameter setting page, also using the lit [ENTER] button.

Furthermore, you can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

NOTE

• Be sure to store any recorded patterns or settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new pattern. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

PTN1≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

©P001:Demo≥01

PTN2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON≥≥≥≥≥

PTN3

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

PTN4

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB

PTN5

≥≥MEMORY≥INFO

Select Pattern.................................................................................................. Page 75

PTN4-1 Quantize Pattern page....................................................................... Page 78

PTN4-2 Merge Pattern page ........................................................................... Page 79

PTN4-3 Clear Pattern page.............................................................................Page 79

PTN4-4 Clear All Patterns page...................................................................... Page 79

PTN4-5 Copy Pattern page .............................................................................Page 79

PTN4-6 Exchange Patterns page ...................................................................Page 80

PTN4-7 Import SMF page............................................................................... Page 80

PTN2-1 Pattern Loop page .............................................................................Page 75

PTN2-2 Pattern Tempo page........................................................................... Page 75

PTN2-3 Pattern Name page............................................................................Page 76

PTN3-1 MIDI Transmit page............................................................................ Page 76

PTN3-2 MIDI Volume page .............................................................................Page 77

PTN3-3 MIDI Pan page................................................................................... Page 77

PTN3-4 Bank Select page...............................................................................Page 77

PTN3-5 Variation Send page .......................................................................... Page 77

PTN3-6 Chorus Send page............................................................................. Page 78

PTN3-7 Reverb Send page .............................................................................Page 78

PTN5-1 Memory Info page.............................................................................. Page 81

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

Owner’s Manual 75

Select Pattern

On the Select Pattern page (PTN1), you can select and play pat-

terns and also set their tempo and time signature. To access this

page, press the [PTN] button, and if necessary, the [B]/[C] but-

tons. If you again press the [PTN] button with this page displayed,

the selected pattern will start to play. To stop playback, press the

[PTN] button once again with the Select Pattern page (PTN1) dis-

played. Whenever you want to edit or record a pattern, further-

more, be sure to select it ﬁrst on this page.

1 Tempo

Use this parameter to set the tempo at which the selected pat-

tern will be played.

• Whenever you select a new pattern, its tempo will be set automatically.

• The Tempo parameter’s setting will be displayed as “ext” and modiﬁca-

tion will not be possible if “ext” has been selected on the UTILITY

area’s MIDI Sync page (UTIL6-6) or if “auto” has been selected on that

page and MIDI clock messages are being received from an external

device.

B Time signature

Use this parameter to set the time signature for playback of

the selected pattern.

• Whenever you select a new pattern, its time signature will be set auto-

matically.

C Pattern category

Use this parameter to select either the Preset (P) or User

(

U) pattern category.

D Pattern number: Pattern name

Use these parameters to select the pattern to be played,

recorded, or processed.

Whenever a demo pattern (P001 to P003) is being played, a

page similar to that shown below will be displayed and modi-

ﬁcation of the tempo or time signature will not be possible.

• Playback of the click track or of patterns assigned to pads will be

stopped whenever playback of a demo pattern is started.

• Playback of demo patterns can be stopped by pressing any button

other than [SHIFT].

Looping, Tempo & Pattern Names

In the COMMON section, you can specify whether the currently

selected pattern is to be played repeatedly as a loop, and you can

also set its tempo and name. With the COMMON page (PTN2)

displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its three parame-

ter-setting pages (PTN2-1 to PTN2-3). You can use the [B]/[C]

buttons to navigate between these pages.

• This section can be used only with User patterns. If a Preset pattern has

been selected, the [ENTER] button will not open a parameter-setting page.

Using the Pattern Loop page, you can specify whether or not the

selected pattern is to be played repeatedly as a loop. The selection

made on this page will apply regardless of whether the pattern is

played using the [

A] button or by striking a pad to which it

has been assigned.

1 Loop

If “on” is selected for this parameter, playback of the pattern

will start again from the beginning whenever it ﬁnishes (i.e.,

looped playback). When set to “off”, the pattern will be

played once to the end and will then stop (i.e., one-shot play-

back).

1 Tempo

Use this parameter to set a tempo for playback of the selected

pattern.

• If the pattern is assigned to a kit, the kit’s tempo setting (see page 47)

will take priority over this setting.

PTN1

Settings 30 to 300

Settings 1/4 to 16/4, 1/8 to 16/8, or 1/16 to 16/16

Settings P or U

Settings

With “P” (Preset pattern) selected: 001 to

128

With “U” (User pattern) selected: 001 to

050

PTN1≥≥≥ƒ=120≥4/4

©P001:Demo≥01

NOTE

≥<<Demo≥01>>

P001:PercsMaster

NOTE

PTN2 COMMON

PTN2-1 Pattern Loop page

Settings off or on

PTN2-2 Pattern Tempo page

Settings 30 to 300

PTN2

≥≥≥≥≥COMMON

NOTE

PTN2-1≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥≥Loop=off

PTN2-2≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥Tempo=120

NOTE

76 Owner’s Manual

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

With the Pattern Name page displayed, press the [ENTER] button

to edit the name of the currently selected pattern.

PTN2-3-1 Pattern Name Setting page

In the Pattern Name Setting page (PTN2-3-1), you can freely

specify a pattern name of up to ten characters in length. Use

the [

]/[C] buttons to move the ﬂashing cursor to the char-

acter you want to change, and then select a character using the

[-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons. The following characters can be

used in pattern names.

[space]

MIDI Settings for Patterns

In the MIDI section, you can conﬁgure the MIDI messages sent

by the currently selected pattern on each individual MIDI chan-

nel. These settings affect MIDI messages sent to both the DTX-

MULTI 12’s internal tone generator and external MIDI devices.

With the MIDI page (PTN3) displayed, press the [ENTER] button

to access its seven parameter-setting pages (PTN3-1 to PTN3-7).

You can use the [

]/[

] buttons to navigate between these

pages.

• This section can be used only with User patterns. If a Preset pattern has

been selected, the [ENTER] button will not open a parameter-setting page.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

Use this parameter to select the MIDI channel (1 to 16) to be

set.

B Transmit

Use this parameter to specify which MIDI messages will be

sent to the internal tone generator and to external MIDI

devices by the currently selected pattern on the MIDI channel

indicated by 1.

•off ............. No MIDI messages will be sent.

• all.............. All applicable MIDI messages will be sent.

•PC............. Only MIDI Program Change messages (includ-

ing bank-select MSB/LSB) will be sent.

PTN2-3 Pattern Name page

PTN2-3≥≥<COMMON>

≥≥≥≥≥≥Name

PTN2-3-1

≥≥[Pattern≥1≥]≥≥

Pattern name

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}ßå

PTN3 MIDI

PTN3-1 MIDI Transmit page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings off, all, or PC

PTN3

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

NOTE

PTN3-1≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥Transmit=all

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

Owner’s Manual 77

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Volume

Use this parameter to set the MIDI volume (Control Change

7) sent by the currently selected pattern on the MIDI channel

indicated by 1. In terms of the internal tone generator, this

value affects all voices played on that channel.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1),

this setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

• If you change the volume setting for MIDI channel 10, the setting on

the Kit Volume page (KIT2-1) will also change to this new setting.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Pan

Use this parameter to set the stereo panning (Control Change

10) sent by the currently selected pattern on the MIDI channel

indicated by 1. In terms of the internal tone generator, this

value affects all voices played on that channel.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1),

this setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Bank select MSB (M)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select MSB value.

C Bank select LSB (L)

Use this parameter to set a bank-select LSB value.

D Program change (PC)

Use this parameter to set a program-change number sent by

the currently selected pattern on the MIDI channel indicated

by 1.

• If “off” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

To select a DTX-MULTI 12 drum kit, set parameters for

MIDI channel 10 as follows.

• Preset kits:

MSB = 125, LSB = 000, PC = Preset kit number

• User kits between U001 and U100:

MSB = 125, LSB = 001, PC = 001 to 100

•User kits between U101 and U200:

MSB = 125, LSB = 002, PC = 001 to 100

If a program-change setting is made for MIDI channel 10, the

current drum kit will be changed immediately.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Variation send level (Var)

Use this parameter to set the variation-send level to be sent by

the currently selected pattern.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1),

this setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

• If MIDI channel 10 is selected, this setting will be displayed as “---” and

modiﬁcation will not be possible.

PTN3-2 MIDI Volume page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 0 to 127

PTN3-3 MIDI Pan page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings L64 to C to R63

PTN3-2≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥≥Volume=100

NOTE

PTN3-3≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥≥≥Pan=≥C

NOTE

PTN3-4 Bank Select page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 000 to 127

Settings 001 to 128

PTN3-5 Variation Send page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 0 to 127

PTN3-4≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

M000/L000/PC001

NOTE

PTN3-5≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

Var=≥≥0(Dry=127)

NOTE

78 Owner’s Manual

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Chorus send level (ChoSend)

Use this parameter to set the chorus-send level to be sent by

the currently selected pattern.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1),

this setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

• If you change the chorus send level for MIDI channel 10, the setting on

the Chorus Send page (KIT3-1) for the currently selected kit will also

change to this new setting.

1 MIDI channel (Ch)

B Reverb send level (RevSend)

Use this parameter to set the reverb-send level to be sent by

the currently selected pattern.

• If “off” or “PC” has been selected on the MIDI Transmit page (PTN3-1),

this setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

• If you change the reverb send level for MIDI channel 10, the setting on

the Reverb Send page (KIT3-2) for the currently selected kit will also

change to this new setting.

Pattern Quantization & Management

In the JOB section, you can quantize the currently selected User

pattern, import SMF ﬁles, and perform other related tasks. With

the JOB page (PTN4) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to

access its seven parameter-setting pages (PTN4-1 to PTN4-7).

You can use the [

]/[

] buttons to navigate between these

pages.

• This section can be used only with User patterns. If a Preset pattern has

been selected, the [ENTER] button will not open a parameter-setting page.

From the Quantize Pattern page, you can correct irregularities in

the timing of notes making up the currently selected User pattern.

This is referred to as quantizing. With the Quantize page dis-

played, press the [ENTER] button to open the Quantize Pattern

Setting page.

PTN4-1-1 Quantize Pattern Setting page

1 Quantize

Use this parameter to specify the quantizing resolution as a

division of a whole note. The lower the resolution, the ﬁner

the correction of timing.

PTN3-6 Chorus Send page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 0 to 127

PTN3-7 Reverb Send page

Settings 1 to 16

Settings 0 to 127

PTN3-6≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥ChoSend=≥≥0

NOTE

PTN3-7≥≥≥≥≥≥Ch≥1

≥≥RevSend=≥40

NOTE

PTN4 JOB

PTN4-1 Quantize Pattern page

Settings

When time signature from PTN1 or for

recording is 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8, or 15/8:

16 note triplets

16 notes

8 note triplets

8 notes

4 notes

Dotted 4 notes

When time signature from PTN1 is other

than the above:

16 note triplets

16 notes

8 note triplets

8 notes

4 note triplets

4 notes

• The natural groove of a recorded performance may be lost as a

result of quantization. Note that once a pattern is quantized, it will

not be possible to reverse the procedure.

PTN4

≥≥≥≥≥≥JOB

NOTE

PTN4-1≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥Quantize

PTN4-1-1

≥≥Quantize=ƒ

˙3

ƒ3

CAUTION

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

Owner’s Manual 79

From the Merge Pattern page, you can merge two patterns and

store the result as a User pattern. To start, select a User pattern to

hold the merged pattern on the Select Pattern page (PTN1). Then,

navigate to the Merge Pattern page and press the [ENTER] button

to open the Merge Pattern Settings page.

PTN4-2-1 Merge Pattern Settings page

1 Merge pattern 1

B Merge pattern 2

Use the above two parameters to specify the patterns that are

to be merged as one.

• If the User pattern selected before opening the Merge Pattern page

already contains data, it will be overwritten with the merged pattern.

• The tempo and time signature of Merge pattern 1 are set as the tempo

and time signature of the merged pattern. If Merge pattern 1 is empty,

however, the tempo and time signature of Merge pattern 2 are used.

• The channel-speciﬁc MIDI settings of Merge pattern 1 are set as those

of the merged pattern. In the case, however, of MIDI channels for

which Merge pattern 1 contains no settings, any applicable settings

from Merge pattern 2 will be applied.

• Generally speaking, only patterns with similar tempos, time signatures,

and MIDI voice settings should be merged.

• Demo patterns cannot be selected for merging.

From the Clear Pattern page, you can delete all data from the cur-

rently selected User pattern. To do so, press the [ENTER] button

with the Clear Pattern page displayed, and when asked to conﬁrm

that you wish to proceed, press the [ENTER] button once again.

From the Clear All Patterns page, you can delete data from all

User patterns. To do so, press the [ENTER] button with the Clear

All Patterns page displayed, and when asked to conﬁrm that you

wish to proceed, press the [ENTER] button once again.

From the Copy Pattern page, you can copy a pattern to the cur-

rently selected User pattern. With the Copy Pattern page dis-

played, press the [ENTER] button to open the Copy Pattern

Setting page.

PTN4-2 Merge Pattern page

Settings P004 to P128 or U001 to U050

Example of how quantizing works

These recorded notes were not played exactly in time.

Notes moved closer to the correct position through quantizing.

Exact position

PTN4-2≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥≥Merge

PTN4-2-1≥<Merge>

≥©P004≥+≥©P005

NOTE

PTN4-3 Clear Pattern page

• When a User pattern is cleared as described above, its data is com-

pletely erased from the instrument’s pattern memory. Be sure, there-

fore, to always save important data on a USB memory device or the

like before deleting.

PTN4-4 Clear All Patterns page

• When User patterns are cleared as described above, their data is

completely erased from the instrument’s pattern memory. Be sure,

therefore, to always save important data on a USB memory device

or the like before deleting.

PTN4-5 Copy Pattern page

CAUTION

PTN4-3≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥≥Clear

CAUTION

PTN4-4≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥Clear≥All

PTN4-5≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥≥≥Copy

80 Owner’s Manual

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

PTN4-5-1 Copy Pattern Setting page

With the Copy Pattern Setting page displayed, press the [ENTER]

button, and when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to proceed, press

the [ENTER] button once again.

1 Pattern to be copied

Use this parameter to select the pattern to be copied to the

currently selected User pattern.

• Demo patterns cannot be copied.

From the Exchange Patterns page, you can swap a pair of User

patterns. With the Exchange Patterns page displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to open the Exchange Patterns Settings page.

PTN4-6-1 Exchange Patterns Settings page

With the Exchange Patterns Settings page displayed, press the

[ENTER] button, and when asked to conﬁrm that you wish to pro-

ceed, press the [ENTER] button once again.

1 Exchange pattern 1

B Exchange pattern 2

Use these parameters to select the two User patterns to be

swapped.

From the Import SMF page, you can import a standard MIDI ﬁle

(SMF) into the DTX-MULTI 12 from a USB memory device for

use as a User pattern. SMFs contain sequenced MIDI data and

have a “.mid” ﬁle extension. It should be noted that the DTX-

MULTI 12 supports Format 0 SMFs only.

PTN4-7-1 Import SMF Setting page

1 SMF ﬁle name

Use this parameter to select the SMF to be imported.

Plug a USB memory device containing the Format-0

SMF to be imported into the USB TO DEVICE port on

the side panel of the DTX-MULTI 12.

Navigate to the Import SMF page (PTN4-7) and press

the [ENTER] button to open the Import SMF Setting

page (PTN4-7-1) shown above. Select the SMF to be

imported and then press the [ENTER] button once

again.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that you wish to proceed.

To import the selected SMF, press the [ENTER] but-

ton. Alternatively, press the [EXIT] button to return

to the previous page without importing.

• If the currently selected User pattern already contains pattern data, it

will be overwritten with the imported data.

The message “Now importing...” will be displayed during the

import process.

• Only standard MIDI ﬁles of Format 0 can be imported.

•In certain cases where a User pattern created from an imported SMF is

looped, voices may not change as expected when playback jumps from

the end back to the beginning, and instead, the voices settings from the

end of the pattern will be maintained throughout. Speciﬁcally, this hap-

pens when program change data from the SMF’s header is not read

upon return to the start of the pattern. To prevent this type of unintended

situation, move any program change messages slightly back from the

SMF header to ensure that they will be correctly read.

Settings P004 to P128 or U001 to U050

• The currently selected User pattern is overwritten as a result of this

procedure. Be sure, therefore, to always save important data on a

USB memory device or the like before copying patterns.

PTN4-6 Exchange Patterns page

Settings U001 to U050

PTN4-5-1≥≥<Copy>

≥©P004≥-ßCurrent

CAUTION

NOTE

PTN4-6≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥≥Exchange

PTN4-6-1≥<Exchg>

≥©U001≥åß≥©U002

PTN4-7 Import SMF page

Settings

Any SMF ﬁle having extension .mid and

stored in the USB memory device’s root

directory.

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB TO

DEVICE port or turn off either the USB memory device or the

DTX-MULTI 12 while data is being imported. Failure to observe

this precaution can lead to the USB memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 being permanently damaged.

PTN4-7≥≥≥≥≥<JOB>

≥≥≥Import≥SMF

PTN4-7-1<Import>

≥≥pattern1.mid

≥≥≥Import≥SMF≥≥

≥Are≥you≥sure?

NOTE

CAUTION

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

PATTERN Setting Area (PTN)

Owner’s Manual 81

Pattern Memory Status

The MEMORY INFO section allows you to check the usage sta-

tus of DTX-MULTI 12 memory for User patterns. To do so, navi-

gate to this section (PTN5) and press the [ENTER] button.

1 Memory usage ratio (%)

This indicates how much of the total User-pattern memory is

currently being used in percentage format.

B Used memory / Total memory (KB)

This indicates separately the amount of memory used and the

total memory in kilobyte (KB) units.

PTN5 MEMORY INFO

PTN5-1 Memory Info page

PTN5

≥≥MEMORY≥INFO

PTN5-1≥≥≥≥≥≥0.0%

≥≥≥0.4KB/896.0KB

82 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

This section describes the UTILITY setting area, which can be accessed using the [UTILITY] button. In this area, you

can set parameters affecting the entire instrument and perform a range of ﬁle management operations.

Makeup of UTILITY Setting Area

The UTILITY setting area is subdivided into three different sections (UTIL1 to UTIL3). Use the [

]/[

] buttons to navigate between

these sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these

pages. In certain cases, a number of additional pages may be accessed from a parameter setting page, also using the lit [ENTER] button.

Furthermore, you can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

• Be sure to store any settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

UTIL1

≥≥≥≥GENERAL

UTIL2

≥≥≥≥≥CLICK

UTIL3

≥≥≥MASTER≥EQ

UTIL4

≥≥≥≥≥≥PAD

UTIL5

≥≥≥≥≥HI-HAT

UTIL6

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

UTIL7

≥≥≥≥≥≥FILE

UTIL8

≥≥FACTORY≥SET

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

UTIL1-1 Master Volume page .........................................................................Page 83

UTIL1-2 Master Tune page.............................................................................. Page 83

UTIL1-3 Startup Kit page ................................................................................ Page 83

UTIL1-4 Startup Pattern page......................................................................... Page 83

UTIL1-5 Startup Trigger page.......................................................................... Page 83

UTIL1-6 Effect Bypass page ...........................................................................Page 83

UTIL1-7 Pan Depth page ................................................................................Page 84

UTIL1-8 Auxiliary Output page........................................................................ Page 84

UTIL4-1 Pad Function page ............................................................................ Page 88

UTIL4-2 Foot Switch Input page .....................................................................Page 89

UTIL4-3 Pad 10-12 Switch page ..................................................................... Page 89

UTIL2-1 Click-track Voice page ....................................................................... Page 84

UTIL2-2 Click-track Master Volume page........................................................ Page 84

UTIL2-3 Click-track Beat Volume page ...........................................................Page 84

UTIL2-4 Click-track Output page.....................................................................Page 84

UTIL2-5 Click-track MIDI page ........................................................................Page 85

UTIL3-1 Gain, Frequency & Bandwidth page .................................................Page 87

UTIL3-2 EQ Shape page................................................................................. Page 87

UTIL3-3 Master EQ Bypass page ...................................................................Page 87

UTIL5-1 Close Position page ..........................................................................Page 89

UTIL5-2 Splash Sensitivity page ..................................................................... Page 89

UTIL5-3 Send Hi-hat Controller page..............................................................Page 89

UTIL6-1 Channel-10 Receive page.................................................................Page 90

UTIL6-2 Program Change Receive page........................................................ Page 90

UTIL6-3 Channel-10 Program Change Receive page .................................... Page 90

UTIL6-4 Polyphonic Aftertouch Status page ................................................... Page 90

UTIL6-5 Local Control page ............................................................................ Page 90

UTIL6-6 MIDI Sync page.................................................................................Page 91

UTIL6-7 Clock Out page .................................................................................Page 91

UTIL6-8 Sequencer Control page ...................................................................Page 91

UTIL6-9 MIDI In/Out page............................................................................... Page 91

UTIL6-10 MIDI Thru Port page........................................................................Page 91

UTIL6-11 MIDI Merge page ............................................................................Page 92

UTIL6-12 Device Number page ......................................................................Page 92

UTIL7-1 Save File page ..................................................................................Page 93

UTIL7-2 Load File page ..................................................................................Page 94

UTIL7-3 Rename File page............................................................................. Page 96

UTIL7-4 Delete File page ................................................................................ Page 97

UTIL7-5 Format page...................................................................................... Page 97

UTIL7-6 Memory Info page ............................................................................. Page 98

Instrument Reset............................................................................................. Page 98

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 83

System Settings

In the GENERAL section, you can set parameters affecting the

entire system. With the GENERAL page (UTIL1) displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to access its eight parameter-setting

pages (UTIL1-1 to UTIL1-8). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons

to navigate between these pages.

1 Master volume

Use this parameter to set the master volume of the instru-

ment’s internal tone generator. If a small value is set here, the

VOLUME dial on the front panel will have very little effect in

increasing the output volume.

1 Master tune (M.Tune)

Use this parameter to tune (i.e., adjust the basic pitch of) the

internal tone generator. The value in parentheses shows the

corresponding tuning (of A above middle C) in Hertz.

• The term “cent” refers to one hundredth of a semitone (i.e., 100 cents

= 1 semitone).

1 StartupKit

Use this parameter to specify the kit to be automatically

selected when the DTX-MULTI 12 is turned on. Kits are

identiﬁed using a category (P for Preset, U for User) and a

number, and you can move the cursor using the [B]/[C]

buttons to set these individually.

1 Startup pattern (StartupPtn)

Use this parameter to select the pattern that will be automati-

cally set when the DTX-MULTI 12 is turned on. Patterns are

identiﬁed using a category (

P for Preset,

U for User) and a

number, and you can move the cursor using the [B]/[C]

buttons to set these individually.

1 Startup trigger (StartupTrg)

Use this parameter to select the trigger setup that will be auto-

matically selected when the DTX-MULTI 12 is turned on.

Trigger setups are identiﬁed using a category (P for Preset, U

for User) and a number, and you can move the cursor using

the [B]/[C] buttons to set these individually.

1 Variation effect (var)

B Chorus effect (cho)

C Reverb effect (rev)

Use these parameters to specify which effects will be

bypassed when Effect Bypass is activated from the front panel

(using the [SHIFT] and [KIT] buttons). When “---” is selected

for an effect type, it will not be bypassed.

UTIL1 GENERAL

UTIL1-1 Master Volume page

Settings 0 to 127

UTIL1-2 Master Tune page

Settings -102.4 to +0.0 to +102.3

UTIL1-3 Startup Kit page

Settings P001 to P050 or U001 to U200

UTIL1

≥≥≥≥GENERAL

UTIL1-1<GENERAL>

MasterVolume=127

UTIL1-2≥≥M.Tune=

+≥≥0.0(440.0Hz)

NOTE

UTIL1-3<GENERAL>

StartupKit=P001

UTIL1-4 Startup Pattern page

Settings eP001 to eP128 or eU001 to eU050

UTIL1-5 Startup Trigger page

Settings P01 to P05 or U01 to U10

UTIL1-6 Effect Bypass page

Settings ---/var, ---/cho, or ---/rev

UTIL1-4<GENERAL>

UTIL1-5<GENERAL>

≥StartupTrg=P01

UTIL1-6≥≥FXByps=

≥≥var/cho/rev

1 2 3

84 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

1 Pan depth

Use this parameter to adjust the width of the instrument’s

overall stereo-panning ﬁeld while maintaining the individual

pan settings for drum and musical instrument sounds.

1 Auxiliary output selection (AuxOutSel)

Use this parameter to indicate where audio input via the AUX

IN jack will be output.

• L&R+ph ............. Auxiliary-input audio will be output via

both the OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) and

PHONES jacks.

• phones ................ Auxiliary-input audio will be output via

the PHONES jack only.

Click Track Settings

In the CLICK section, you can set parameters related to the click

track. For example, you can set the type of sound to be used, the

volume, and where the click track will be output. MIDI parame-

ters related to the click track can also be set here. With the CLICK

page (UTIL2) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its

ﬁve parameter-setting pages (UTIL2-1 to UTIL2-5). You can use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Click-track voice

Use this parameter to select from a range of different sounds

for use with the click track.

1 Click-track master volume

Use this parameter to set the master volume for click-track

sounds.

1 Click-track beat volumes

Use these parameters to set volumes for different beat timings

within the click track. The meanings of the symbols used on

this page are shown below.

Example: Beat timings for four beats per bar

• If the time signature from the PATTERN setting area or for pattern

recording is 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8, or 15/8, this page will display ACC, dot-

ted quarter notes, eighth notes, and sixteenth notes.

1 Click-track output selection (ClkOutSel)

Use this parameter to specify where the click track will be

output when activated. In a live-performance setting, for

example, you would normally want the click track to be out-

put to headphones only, and in such a case, “phones” should

be selected here.

• L&R+ph ............. The click-track will be output via both the

OUTPUT (L/MONO and R) and

PHONES jacks.

• phones ................ The click-track will be output via the

PHONES jack only.

UTIL1-7 Pan Depth page

Settings 1 to 127

UTIL1-8 Auxiliary Output page

Settings L&R+ph or phones

UTIL2 CLICK

UTIL2-1 Click-track Voice page

Settings

Metronome1, Metronome2, Cowbell, Stick,

Human

UTIL1-7<GENERAL>

≥≥PanDepth=≥64

UTIL1-8<GENERAL>

AuxOutSel=L&R+ph

UTIL2

≥≥≥≥≥CLICK

UTIL2-1≥≥<CLICK>

Voice=Metronome1

UTIL2-2 Click-track Master Volume page

Settings 0 to 127

UTIL2-3 Click-track Beat Volume page

Settings 0 to 9

UTIL2-4 Click-track Output page

Settings L&R+ph, phones

UTIL2-2≥≥<CLICK>

≥≥≥Volume=127

UTIL2-3≥A…=9≥ƒ=9

≥≥≥≥∫=0≥ææ=0≥ø=0

Accents

4 notes

8 notes

16 notes

8 note triplets

NOTE

UTIL2-4≥≥<CLICK>

ClkOutSel=phones

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 85

From the Click-track MIDI page (UTIL2-5), you can set a range

of MIDI parameters related to the click track. With this page dis-

played, press the [ENTER] button to access a further four param-

eter-setting pages (UTIL2-5-1 to UTIL2-5-4). You can use the

[B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

UTIL2-5-1 Click-track MIDI In page

1 MIDI IN

Use this parameter to specify whether or not click-track

sounds are to be produced based on MIDI Note On messages

received via the MIDI IN connector. When set to “on”, the

DTX-MULTI 12 operates as follows:

•A click-track accent sound will be produced upon the

receipt of a MIDI note with the note number set on the

Accent Note Number page (UTIL2-5-3).

•A click-track quarter note sound will be produced upon the

receipt of a MIDI note with the note number set on the

Quarter-Note Note Number page (UTIL2-5-4).

UTIL2-5-2 Click-Track MIDI Out page

1 MIDI OUT

Use this parameter to turn the output of click-track MIDI

events (i.e., MIDI Note On messages) on and off. When set to

“on”, the DTX-MULTI 12 operates as follows:

•A MIDI note with the note number set on the Accent Note

Number page (UTIL2-5-3) will be produced for each click-

track accent sound.

•A MIDI note with the note number set on the Quarter-Note

Note Number page (UTIL2-5-4) will be produced for each

click-track quarter note sound.

• Regardless of this parameter’s setting, no MIDI Note On messages

can be produced for click-track sounds other than accents and quarter

notes.

UTIL2-5-3 Accent Note Number page

1 Accent note number (NoteAcc)

Use this parameter to assign a MIDI note number to click-

track accent sounds.

• If “on” is selected on the Click-track MIDI In page

(UTIL2-5-1), a click-track accent sound will be produced

each time a MIDI note with the note number set here is

received.

• If “off” is selected on this page (UTIL2-5-3), no click-track accent

sounds will be produced in response to received MIDI notes.

• If the same value is set on this page (UTIL2-5-3) and on the Quarter-

Note Note Number page (UTIL2-5-4), the same sound will be pro-

duced for all beat timings.

• If “on” is selected on the Click-Track MIDI Out page

(UTIL2-5-2), a MIDI Note On message with the note num-

ber set here will be produced for each click-track accent

sound.

• If “off” is selected both on this page (UTIL2-5-3) and on the Quarter-

Note Note Number page (UTIL2-5-4), no MIDI Note On messages will

be output for click-track sounds. If, however, “off” is selected on this

page (UTIL2-5-3) but a setting other than “off” is selected on the Quar-

ter-Note Note Number page (UTIL2-5-4), MIDI Note On messages

with the corresponding note number will be output for all click-track

sounds.

UTIL2-5-4 Quarter-Note Note Number page

1 Quarter-note note number (Noteqq

)

Use this parameter to assign a MIDI note number to click-

track quarter note sounds.

• If “on” is selected on the Click-track MIDI In page

(UTIL2-5-1), a click-track quarter-note sound will be pro-

duced each time a MIDI note with the note number set here

is received.

• If “off” is selected on this page (UTIL2-5-4), no click-track quarter-note

sounds will be produced in response to received MIDI notes.

• If “on” is selected on the Click-Track MIDI Out page

(UTIL2-5-2), a MIDI Note On message with the note num-

ber set here will be produced for each click-track quarter-

note sound.

• If “off” is selected on this page (UTIL2-5-4), no MIDI Note On mes-

sages will be produced for click-track quarter-note sounds.

UTIL2-5 Click-track MIDI page

Settings off or on

UTIL2-5

≥≥≥Click≥MIDI

UTIL2-5-1<CLICK>

≥≥MIDI≥IN=off

UTIL2-5-2<CLICK>

≥≥MIDI≥OUT=off

NOTE

Settings off or C#-2 to F#8

UTIL2-5-3<CLICK>

NoteA…=C#-1/≥13

NOTE

UTIL2-5-4<CLICK>

≥Noteƒ=C#-1/≥13

NOTE

86 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Master Equalization

In the MASTER EQ section, you can adjust the master equaliza-

tion parameters that control the tone of all preset voices, patterns,

and waves. With the MASTER EQ page (UTIL3) displayed, press

the [ENTER] button to access its three parameter-setting pages

(UTIL3-1 to UTIL3-3). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to nav-

igate between these pages.

The DTX-MULTI 12 features a ﬁve-band master equalizer that

allows the signal level to be freely boosted or cut around a center

frequency speciﬁed for each of the bands. In addition, the “low”

and “high” frequency bands can be set to either shelving or peak-

ing equalization.

• Master equalization has no effect on signals from the AUX IN connector.

(See page 36)

• Master equalization has no effect on signals output via the PHONES jack.

(See page 36)

Tap Tempo

Using the Tap Tempo function, you can set the tempo for pat-

terns and the click track by simply striking pads. In this way,

you can conveniently and intuitively set the tempo that you

need.

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the

[EE

] (click) button.

The Tap Tempo page will open displaying the current

tempo setting.

Strike one or more of the pads several times at

the required tempo.

The DTX-MULTI 12 will automatically determine the

tempo based on the speed at which you strike the pads, and

this tempo will be displayed on-screen.

To check the tempo, press the [EE

] (click) but-

ton to start the click track.

The click track will be played at the tempo set using the

Tap Tempo function. Whenever you change the tempo

using this function, the new setting will be immediately

applied to the click track and any patterns being played.

• The [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons can also be used to adjust the

tempo on the Tap Tempo page.

• If Func has been set to “tap tempo” for any of the pads on the

UTILITY area’s Pad Function page (UTIL4-1), that pad can be

used at any time to tap the tempo without having to open the Tap

Tempo page (see page 88).

• If “ext” has been selected on the UTILITY area’s MIDI Sync page

(UTIL 6-6) or if “auto” has been selected on that page and MIDI

Clock messages are being received from an external source, the

tempo value will be displayed as “ext” and playback on your DTX-

MULTI 12 will be synchronized with the connected MIDI devices or

DAW application.

• If “int” has been selected on the UTILITY area’s MIDI Sync page

(UTIL 6-6) or if “auto” has been selected on that page and MIDI

Clock messages are not being received from an external source,

playback will occur at the DTX-MULTI 12’s current tempo setting

(see page 91).

TAP≥TEMPO

≥≥≥≥≥ƒ=120

TAP≥TEMPO

≥≥≥≥≥ƒ=158

Tempo: 30 to 300

NOTE

UTIL3 MASTER EQ

UTIL3

≥≥≥MASTER≥EQ

low highhighMidmidlowMid

–

Q (Bandwidth)

Five EQ bands

Gain (G)

F (Frequency)

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 87

1 Frequency band

Use this parameter to select the master-EQ frequency band to

be set.

B Gain (G)

Use this parameter to specify the amount by which the signal

level in the frequency band indicated by 1 will be boosted or

cut.

C Frequency (F)

Use this parameter to specify the frequency within the band

indicated by 1 around which the signal level will be cut or

boosted. If the “low” band has been selected, the range of

available frequencies will depend on the EQ type set using the

Shape parameter on the EQ Shape page (UTIL3-2).

D Bandwidth (Q)

Use this parameter to specify a width for the band of frequen-

cies to be boosted or cut. If you set a large value, a narrower

band of frequencies will be affected and the tone will change

markedly around the center frequency. If you set a smaller

value, a wider band of frequencies will be affected and the

tone will change gradually around the center frequency.

• When “low” or “high” is indicated by 1 and “shelving” has been set using

the Shape parameter on the EQ Shape page (UTIL3-2), the setting for

Bandwidth (Q) will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possi-

ble.

On the EQ Shape page, you can set an EQ type for each of the

“low” and “high” bands.

1 Frequency band

Use this parameter to select the master-EQ frequency band to

be set.

B Shape

Use this parameter to set an EQ type.

● shelving:

Signals at all frequencies either above or below the speciﬁed

frequency will be boosted or cut.

● peaking:

Signals within a band of frequencies around the speciﬁed fre-

quency will be boosted or cut.

1 Master EQ bypass (MEQBypass)

Use this parameter to specify whether the master EQ will be

bypassed (“on”) or applied (“off”).

UTIL3-1 Gain, Frequency & Bandwidth

page

Settings low, lowMid, mid, highMid, or high

Settings -12 to +0 to +12

Settings

low:

32 to 2.0k for “shelving”

63 to 2.0k for “peaking”

lowMid, mid, and highMid: 100 to 10k

high: 500 to 16k

Settings 0.1 to 12.0

UTIL3-1≥≥≥≥≥≥mid

G+12/F2.0k/Q≥0.1

–

Q = 0.1

Q = 12.0

F (Frequency)

Frequency

NOTE

UTIL3-2 EQ Shape page

Settings low or high

Settings shelving or peaking

UTIL3-3 Master EQ Bypass page

Settings off or on

UTIL3-2≥≥≥≥≥≥low

≥Shape=shelving

–

EQ low EQ high

G (Gain)

F (Frequency)

G (Gain)

(Frequency)

Frequency Frequency

–

G (Gain)

F (Frequency)

Frequency

UTIL3-3

≥MEQ≥Bypass=off

88 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Pad Utilities

In the PAD section, you can assign functions to pads and external

controllers, specify the type of controller connected via the FOOT

SW jack, and enable or disable rim pads 10 to 12. With the PAD

page (UTIL4) displayed, press the [ENTER] button to access its

three parameter-setting pages (UTIL4-1 to UTIL4-3). You can use

the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between these pages.

On the Pad Function page, you can specify operations to be per-

formed when individual pads or external controllers are struck or

operated.

1 Pad number

Use this parameter to select the pad or external controller to

be set. You can also strike a pad to select it.

B Pad function (Func)

Use this parameter to set the operation to be performed when

the pad or external controller indicated by 1 is struck or

operated.

•off ....................... Voices will be played in the normal way.

• inc kitNo............. The kit number will be increased by 1.

• dec kitNo ............ The kit number will be decreased by 1.

• inc ptnNo............ The pattern number will be increased by

• dec ptnNo ........... The pattern number will be decreased by

• inc tempo............ The tempo will be increased by 1 bpm.

• dec tempo ........... The tempo will be decreased by 1 bpm.

• tap tempo............ The pad or external controller can be used

to tap the tempo.

• clickOn/Off......... The click track will be turned on or off.

• CC01 to CC95 .... A MIDI Control Change message will be

sent to the internal tone generator and

connected external MIDI devices.

When a MIDI Control Change message (CC01 to CC95) is

speciﬁed as the pad function, control-change values and the

MIDI send channel are set as follows.

C Control change value

Use this parameter to set a value for the MIDI control-change

message indicated by 2.

• If setting a pad or external controller other than

“FTSW”: This value will be sent when the pad or external

controller is struck or operated.

• If setting “FTSW” and “ftSw” is selected on the Foot

Switch Input page (UTIL4-2): 3-a is the value that will

be sent when the foot switch is released, and 3-b is the

value that will be sent when the foot switch is depressed.

• If setting “FTSW” and “ftSw” is not selected on the

Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2): A speciﬁc control-

change value cannot be speciﬁed in this case. Instead, a

value within the range 0 to 127 will be sent based on the

degree by which the hi-hat controller or foot controller is

operated.

D Control-change send channel

Use this parameter to set a MIDI channel for sending the

MIDI Control Change message indicated by 2.

UTIL4 PAD

UTIL4-1 Pad Function page

Settings

01 to 12, 13, 13R1, 13R2, 14 to 17, FTSW

(foot switch), HHCL (hi-hat close), or HHSP

(hi-hat splash)

Settings

off, inc kitNo, dec kitNo, inc ptnNo, dec

ptnNo, inc tempo, dec tempo, tap tempo,

clickOn/Off, or CC01 to CC95

UTIL4

≥≥≥≥≥≥PAD

UTIL4-1≥-º¡-

Func=clickOn/Off

Settings 0 to 127

Settings 1 to 16

UTIL4-1≥-º¡-≥≥†”

Func=CC01/127

2 3

UTIL4-1≥-√¤‘’-†”

Func=CC01/≥0-127

3-a

3-b

UTIL4-1≥-√¤‘’-†”

Func=CC01

If setting a pad or external controller other than “FTSW”:

If setting “FTSW” and “ftSw” is selected on the

Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2):

If setting “FTSW” and “ftSw” is not selected on the

Foot Switch Input page (UTIL4-2):

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 89

1 Foot switch input selection (FootSwInsel)

Use this parameter to specify whether a foot switch (“ftSw”),

a hi-hat controller (“HH65”), or a foot controller (“FC7”) is

connected via the FOOT SW jack.

• The velocities sent when a hi-hat controller or a foot controller is con-

nected will depend on the setting made on the Trigger Velocity page

(MIDI1-7).

• The velocities sent when a foot switch is connected also depend on

the setting made on the Trigger Velocity page (MIDI1-7); however, if

“variable” is selected on that page, velocities will be sent with a ﬁxed

value of 100.

1 Pad10-12

Use this parameter to turn rim pads 10 to 12 on (“enable”) or

off (“disable”). This function can prove useful in preventing

voices assigned to these rim pads from being played when

they are accidentally struck instead of pads 7 to 9.

• enable ................. The rim pads will operate in the normal

way.

• disable ................ Functions assigned to these rim pads will

be disabled. When they are struck, the

DTX-MULTI 12 behaves in the same way

as if the corresponding main pads (7 to 9)

had been struck.

Hi-hat Setup

In the HI-HAT section, you can set parameters related to hi-hats.

With the HI-HAT page (UTIL5) displayed, press the [ENTER]

button to access its three parameter-setting pages (UTIL5-1 to

UTIL5-3). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to navigate between

these pages.

1 Close position (ClosePosi)

Use this parameter to adjust the position at which the hi-hat

switches from open to closed when a hi-hat controller is

depressed. The lower the value, the smaller the virtual open-

ing between the top and bottom hi-hats.

1 Splash sensitivity (SplashSens)

Use this parameter to set the degree of sensitivity for detect-

ing hi-hat foot splashes. The higher the value, the easier it will

be to produce foot-splash sounds with the hi-hat controller.

High values may, however, result in splash sounds being unin-

tentionally produced when, for example, you depress the hi-

hat controller lightly to keep time. It is a good idea to set this

parameter to “off” if you do not want to play foot splashes.

1 Send hi-hat controller (SendHH)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

sending of MIDI messages corresponding to continuous

motion of the hi-hat controller between the open and closed

positions.

• If “hi-hat” is selected on the Hi-Hat Function page (KIT7-3), MIDI mes-

sages will be sent only when this parameter is set to “on”.

• If “MIDI” is selected on the Hi-Hat Function page (KIT7-3), MIDI mes-

sages will always be sent, regardless of whether this parameter is set

to “on” or “off”.

UTIL4-2 Foot Switch Input page

Settings ftSw, HH65, or FC7

UTIL4-3 Pad 10-12 Switch page

Settings enable or disable

UTIL5 HI-HAT

UTIL4-2≥≥≥≥<PAD>

FootSwInSel=ftSw

NOTE

UTIL4-3≥≥≥≥<PAD>

Pad10-12=enable

UTIL5

≥≥≥≥≥HI-HAT

UTIL5-1 Close Position page

Settings -32 to +0 to +32

UTIL5-2 Splash Sensitivity page

Settings off or 1 to 127

UTIL5-3 Send Hi-hat Controller page

Settings off or on

UTIL5-1≥<HI-HAT>

≥ClosePosi=+10

UTIL5-2≥<HI-HAT>

≥SplashSens=127

UTIL5-3≥<HI-HAT>

≥≥≥SendHH=on

NOTE

90 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Instrument MIDI Setup

In the MIDI section, you can set MIDI parameters affecting the

entire DTX-MULTI 12 system. With the MIDI page (UTIL6) dis-

played, press the [ENTER] button to access its twelve parameter-

setting pages (UTIL6-1 to UTIL6-12). You can use the [B]/[C]

buttons to navigate between these pages.

1 Channel-10 receive (Rcv10ch)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

receipt of MIDI messages sent by external devices on Chan-

nel 10. If set to “off”, the internal tone generator will play

voices on Channel 10 in response only to input from the

DTX-MULTI 12’s pads and from pads connected via the PAD

jacks.

1 Program change receive (RcvPC)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

receipt of MIDI Program Change messages. If set to “off” and

a new drum kit is selected, voices will be changed only based

on settings made for that kit’s preset voices. If you want

voices on all MIDI channels to change in line with pattern set-

tings or in response to signals from external MIDI devices,

this parameter should be set to “on”.

1 Channel-10 program change receive

(RcvPC10ch)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

receipt of MIDI Program Change messages sent on MIDI

channel 10. Select “on” if you want kits to change in line with

pattern settings or in response to signals from external MIDI

devices. Note that this setting is effective only when “on” is

also selected on the Program Change Receive page (UTIL6-

2).

1 Polyphonic aftertouch status (PolyAfter)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

exchange of polyphonic aftertouch messages with external

MIDI devices.

1 Local control (LocalCtrl)

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) playing

of the internal tone generator using DTX-MULTI 12 pads and

patterns. Normally, this is set to “on”, meaning that the tone

generator is locally controlled. If set to “off,” the pads and

external controllers are essentially disconnected from the

internal tone generator – in other words, no sound is produced

by the DTX-MULTI 12 when you strike them.

•Even if local control is disabled (i.e., set to “off”) on this page, the DTX-

MULTI 12’s internal tone generator can produce sound in response to

MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN connector and the USB TO

HOST port; furthermore, MIDI messages produced by pads, patterns,

and external controllers will be output via the MIDI OUT connector.

UTIL6 MIDI

UTIL6-1 Channel-10 Receive page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-2 Program Change Receive page

Settings off or on

UTIL6

≥≥≥≥≥≥MIDI

UTIL6-1≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥≥Rcv10ch=on

UTIL6-2≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥≥≥RcvPC=on

UTIL6-3

Channel-10 Program Change

Receive page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-4 Polyphonic Aftertouch Status

page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-5 Local Control page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-3≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥RcvPC10ch=on

UTIL6-4≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥PolyAfter=on

UTIL6-5≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥LocalCtrl=on

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 91

1 MIDI synchronization (MIDISync)

Use this parameter to specify whether patterns and the click

track are to play at the tempo set for the DTX-MULTI 12 or

are to be synchronized with external MIDI devices based on

MIDI Clock messages (i.e., F8 Timing Clock) received from

them.

• int ........ Patterns and the click track will play at the current

DTX-MULTI 12 tempo setting. Use “int” when this

instrument is to be used alone or as the master

clock source for other equipment.

•ext........ The DTX-MULTI 12 will be synchronized with

MIDI Clock messages received via MIDI. Use

“ext” when an external MIDI device is to be used as

the master clock source for synchronized playback.

• auto...... MIDI Clock messages received via MIDI will be

prioritized over the DTX-MULTI 12’s current

tempo. In other words, playback will be synchro-

nized to MIDI Clock messages whenever they are

received, and the internal tempo will be used in all

other cases.

• In order to successfully synchronize the DTX-MULTI 12 whenever this

parameter is set to “ext” or “auto”, the connected external MIDI device

or computer must be setup to send MIDI Clock messages.

1 Clock out

Use this parameter to enable (“on”) or disable (“off”) the

sending of MIDI Clock messages (i.e., F8 Timing Clock) via

the MIDI OUT connector.

1 Sequencer control (SeqCtrl)

Use this parameter to specify whether or not System Realtime

messages (i.e., FA Start, FB Continue, and FC Stop) will be

sent and received via MIDI.

•off.........System Realtime messages are neither sent nor

received.

•in..........System Realtime messages are received but not

sent.

• out ........System Realtime messages are sent but not

received.

• in/out....System Realtime messages are sent and received.

• If “strt”, “cont”, or “stop” has been set on the MIDI Message page

(MIDI1), the SeqCtrl setting 1 will have no effect and the respective

message (i.e., FA Start, FB Continue, or FC Stop) will be output.

1 MIDI IN/OUT

Use this parameter to specify whether the exchange of MIDI

messages with external devices is to be performed via the

MIDI connectors or the USB TO HOST port.

1 MIDI Thru port (ThruPort)

When the DTX-MULTI 12 receives MIDI messages from a

computer connected via USB, it can relay those messages

received via a speciﬁc port to the MIDI OUT connector so

that they can be output to other external MIDI devices. Use

this parameter to specify that port.

UTIL6-6 MIDI Sync page

Settings int, ext, or auto

UTIL6-7 Clock Out page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-6≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥MIDI≥Sync=int

NOTE

UTIL6-7≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥≥ClockOut=on

UTIL6-8 Sequencer Control page

Settings off, in, out, or in/out

UTIL6-9 MIDI In/Out page

Settings MIDI or USB

UTIL6-10 MIDI Thru Port page

Settings 1 or 2

UTIL6-8≥≥≥<MIDI>

≥SeqCtrl=in/out

NOTE

UTIL6-9≥≥≥<MIDI>

MIDI≥IN/OUT=MIDI

UTIL6-10≥≥<MIDI>

≥≥≥ThruPort=1

92 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

1 MIDI merge

The MIDI Merge function allows you to mix MIDI messages

received via the MIDI IN connector with performance data

produced by playing the DTX-MULTI 12, and to output this

mixed MIDI data via the MIDI OUT connector. Set this

parameter to “on” to enable this merging of MIDI messages.

• If “USB” has been selected on the MIDI In/Out page (UTIL6-9), this

setting will be displayed as “---” and modiﬁcation will not be possible.

1 Device number

Use this parameter to set a MIDI device number for the DTX-

MULTI 12. In order to successfully exchange bulk data,

parameter changes, and other system exclusive MIDI mes-

sages, this setting must match the Device Number of the

external MIDI device.

• all......... System exclusive messages for all MIDI device

numbers will be received. In addition, the DTX-

MULTI 12 will transmit messages using Device

Number 1.

•off ........ System exclusive messages such as bulk dump and

parameter changes will be neither transmitted nor

received. An error message will be displayed if an

attempt is made to perform such an operation.

File Management

In the FILE section, you can perform a range of ﬁle-management

operations. With the FILE page (UTIL7) displayed, press the

[ENTER] button to access its six parameter-setting pages

(UTIL7-1 to UTIL7-6). You can use the [B]/[C] buttons to nav-

igate between these pages.

A number of terms will be used in the following descriptions of

ﬁle management functions and operations. Please take a moment

to familiarize yourself with their meanings in order that these

functions and operations can be more easily understood.

File

The term “ﬁle” is used to deﬁne a collection of data stored on a

USB memory device or within the DTX-MULTI 12’s internal

memory. The exchange of data with USB memory devices is car-

ried out in the form of ﬁles.

File name

As with your computer, the DTX-MULTI 12 can assign names to

individual ﬁles. These names are used to tell ﬁles apart, and for

this reason, no two ﬁles within a speciﬁc directory can share the

same ﬁle name. Although computers can handle very long ﬁle

names that can even contain non-English characters, the DTX-

MULTI 12 requires that names be limited to eight alphanumeric

characters.

File extension

The three letters following the period at the end of a ﬁle name –

such as “.mid” and “.wav” – are referred to as a “ﬁle extension.”

The type of data contained within the ﬁle is identiﬁed by the ﬁle

extension. Please note that, although this instrument assigns ﬁle

extensions to ﬁle names, they are not displayed on-screen in order

to allow the available space to be used more efﬁciently.

File size

The amount of memory needed to store a ﬁle is indicated by the

ﬁle size. These sizes and also the capacities of memory devices

are presented in standard computer format using B (bytes), KB

(kilo bytes), MB (mega bytes), and GB (giga bytes). (1 KB is

equivalent to 1,024 bytes, 1 MB is equivalent to 1,024 KB, and 1

GB is equivalent to 1,024 MB.)

USB memory device

The term “USB memory device” is used to refer to hard disks and

other external USB memory units used for the storage and

retrieval of ﬁles.

UTIL6-11 MIDI Merge page

Settings off or on

UTIL6-12 Device Number page

Settings 1 to 16, all, or off

UTIL6-11≥≥<MIDI>

≥≥≥Merge=off

NOTE

UTIL6-12≥≥<MIDI>

≥DeviceNo.=all

UTIL7 FILE

File-related terms

UTIL7

≥≥≥≥≥≥FILE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 93

Directory

A hierarchical directory system is used on memory devices in

order to group ﬁles together according to type or application. In

this regard, a “directory” is equivalent to a folder as used on a

computer. As with ﬁles, you can assign names to individual direc-

tories. File operations are carried out inside a set of special direc-

tories that are created as follows within a USB memory device

when it is formatted for use on the Format page (UTIL7-5).

Please note that the DTX-MULTI 12 does not display this direc-

tory structure on-screen.

Format

The operation of initializing a USB memory device is referred to

as “formatting”. Whenever you format a USB memory device

using this instrument, any previously created ﬁles and directories

(or folders) will be erased and the special directories shown above

will be created.

Save and Load

The term “save” refers to the writing of data created on the DTX-

MULTI 12 to a USB memory device for storage, while “load”

refers to the reading of ﬁles from the memory device into the

instrument’s internal memory. From the Save File page, you can

save ﬁles on a USB memory device as follows.

From the Save File page, you can save ﬁles on a USB memory

device as follows.

Plug a USB memory device formatted for use with

the DTX-MULTI 12 on the Format page (UTIL7-5) into

the USB TO DEVICE port on the side of the instru-

ment.

Navigate to the Save File page (UTIL7-1) and press

the [ENTER] button.

The Type page (UTIL7-1-1) will open.

The Type parameter speciﬁes the types of ﬁle to be saved.

• All .......................All user data – i.e., all User kits, all

waves, all User patterns, all User triggers,

and utility settings.

• AllKit ..................All User-kit data

• AllWave ..............All wave data

• AllPattern............All User-pattern data

• AllTrigger ...........All User-trigger data

• Utility..................Utility settings

• If you select “AllPattern” despite User patterns having not yet being

created, a “No Data” error message will be displayed and no data will

be saved.

• If you select “AllWave” despite all waves still being empty, a “No Wave

Data” error message will be displayed and no data will be saved.

Specify a ﬁle type using the Type parameter, and

press the [ENTER] button.

The Name page (UTIL7-1-2) will open. Set a name for the ﬁle

to be saved.

The [B]/[C] buttons can be used to move the ﬂashing cur-

sor, and the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons can be used to scroll

through the available characters. File names can be up to eight

characters long.

•Any space characters included in ﬁle names will be automatically

replaced with “_” (i.e., an underscore).

\YAMAHA

DTXMULTI

ALL All

ALLKIT AllKit

ALLWAV AllWave

ALLPTN AllPattern

ALLTRG AllTrigger

UTL Utility

UTIL7-1 Save File page

Settings

All, AllKit, AllWave, AllPattern, AllTrigger, or

Utility

UTIL7-1≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥Save≥File

UTIL7-1-1≥<FILE>

Type=All

File type

NOTE

UTIL7-1-2≥<FILE>

Name=[ALL_DATA]

File name

NOTE

94 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

When you have set a ﬁle name, press the [ENTER]

button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that the data is to be saved. To

proceed, press the [ENTER] button. Alternatively, you can

press the [EXIT] button to return to Step 3 above without sav-

ing.

If a ﬁle of the same name already exists, you will be asked to

conﬁrm whether it is to be overwritten as shown below. If you

want to set a different ﬁle name to avoid overwriting, press the

[EXIT] button to return to the Name page (UTIL7-1-2).

Press the [ENTER] button to save the ﬁle.

The following message will be displayed as the data is being

saved. If you press the [EXIT] button at this time, the save

process will be aborted and the display will return to the

Name page (UTIL7-1-2).

When the ﬁle has been saved, the display will return to the

Save File page (UTIL7-1).

From the Load File page, you can load ﬁles previously saved on a

USB memory device into the DTX-MULTI 12.

Plug the USB memory device containing the

required ﬁles into the USB TO DEVICE port on the

side of the DTX-MULTI 12.

Navigate to the Load File page (UTIL7-2) and press

the [ENTER] button.

The Type page (UTIL7-2-1) will open.

The Type parameter speciﬁes the types of ﬁle to be loaded.

• All ...............All user data – i.e., all User kits, all waves, all

User patterns, all User triggers, and utility set-

tings.

• AllKit ..........All User-kit data

• Kit ...............A single User kit

• AllWave.......All wave data

•Wave............A single wave

• AllPattern ....All User-pattern data

•Pattern ......... A single User pattern

• AllTrigger....All User-trigger data

•Trigger......... A single User trigger setup

• Utility ..........Utility settings

Specify a ﬁle type using the Type parameter, and

press the [ENTER] button.

The File page (UTIL7-2-2) will open.

Select the ﬁle to be loaded using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons. Only those ﬁles matching your selection on the Type

page (UTIL7-2-1) will be presented for loading. If you are

loading a single ﬁle, you will ﬁrst of all need to select the All

ﬁle that contains it (for example, when loading a single drum

kit, you ﬁrst select a ﬁle saved with the type “AllKit”). It is

not, however, possible to load a single ﬁle when an All type

has been selected for loading.

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB TO

DEVICE port or turn off either the memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 while data is being saved. Failure to observe this pre-

caution can lead to the memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12

being permanently damaged.

≥≥≥Save≥File

≥Are≥you≥sure?

≥≥≥Save≥File

≥≥≥Overwrite?

≥Now≥saving...

[EXIT]≥to≥cancel

CAUTION

UTIL7-1≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥Save≥File

UTIL7-2 Load File page

Settings

All, AllKit, Kit, AllWave, Wave, AllPattern,

Pattern, AllTrigger, Trigger, or Utility

UTIL7-2≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥Load≥File

UTIL7-2-1≥<FILE>

Type=All

File type

UTIL7-2-2≥<FILE>

≥File=ALL_DATA

File name

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 95

When you have selected the ﬁle to be loaded, press

the [ENTER] button.

If “All”, “AllKit”, “AllWave”, “AllPattern”, “AllTrigger”,

or “Utility” was selected:

The applicable page from Step 8 below will be displayed.

If “Kit”, “Wave”, “Pattern”, or “Trigger” was selected:

The applicable page from Step 5 below will be displayed.

Select the required package of data from inside the

selected ﬁle.

You can scroll through the available data using the [-/DEC]

and [+/INC] buttons.

When you have selected the ﬁle to be loaded, press

the [ENTER] button.

Select a destination for the data to be loaded.

The [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons can be used to select the

number of the User kit, wave, User pattern, or User trigger to

be overwritten with the loaded data.

When you have selected the ﬁle to be loaded, press

the [ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that the data is to be loaded.

To proceed, press the [ENTER] button.

The following message will be displayed as the data is being

loaded.

When the data has been loaded, the display will return to the

Load File page (UTIL7-2).

Settings

Kit: U001 to U200

Wave: WV001 to WV500

Pattern: eU001 to eU050

Tr igger: U01 to U10

UTIL7-2-3≥≥<Src>

U001:MyKit

UTIL7-2-3≥≥<Src>

WV001:MyWave

UTIL7-2-3≥≥<Src>

©U001:MyPtn

UTIL7-2-3≥≥<Src>

U01:MyTrigger

If “Kit” was selected:

If “Wave” was selected:

If “Pattern” was selected:

If “Trigger” was selected:

Settings

Kit: U001 to U200

Wave: WV001 to WV500

Pattern: eU001 to eU050

Tr igger: U01 to U10

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB TO

DEVICE port or turn off either the memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 while data is being loaded. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to the memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12

being permanently damaged.

UTIL7-2-4≥≥<Dst>

U001:User≥Kit

UTIL7-2-4≥≥<Dst>

WV001:Empty≥Wave

UTIL7-2-4≥≥<Dst>

U01:User≥Trigger

If “Kit” was selected:

If “Wave” was selected:

If “Pattern” was selected:

If “Trigger” was selected:

≥≥≥Load≥File

≥Are≥you≥sure?

Now≥loading.....

[EXIT]≥to≥cancel

CAUTION

UTIL7-2≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥Load≥File

96 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

From the Rename File page, you can rename ﬁles that have been

saved on a USB memory device.

Plug the USB memory device into the USB TO

DEVICE port on the side of the DTX-MULTI 12.

Navigate to the Rename File page (UTIL7-3) and

press the [ENTER] button to open the Type page

(UTIL7-3-1).

Use the Type parameter to indicate the type of ﬁle to be

renamed.

• All................All user data – i.e., all User kits, all User

waves, all User patterns, all User triggers, and

utility settings.

• AllKit...........All User-kit data

• AllWave.......All wave data

• AllPattern ....All User-pattern data

• AllTrigger....All User-trigger data

• Utility ..........Utility settings

Press the [ENTER] button to open the Rename From

page (UTIL7-3-2).

Select the ﬁle to be renamed using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons.

Only those ﬁles matching your selection on the Type page

(UTIL7-3-1) will be presented for renaming.

Press the [ENTER] button to open the Rename To

page (UTIL7-3-3).

The [B]/[C] buttons can be used to move the ﬂashing cur-

sor, and the [-/DEC] and [+/INC] buttons can be used to scroll

through the available characters. File names can be up to eight

characters long.

•Any space characters included in ﬁle names will be automatically

replaced with “_” (i.e., an underscore).

When you have set the new ﬁle name, press the

[ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that the ﬁle is to be renamed.

Press the [ENTER] button to rename the ﬁle.

The following message will be displayed as the ﬁle is being

renamed.

When the renaming process has been completed, the message

“Completed.” will be displayed. Following this, the display

will return to the Rename File page (UTIL7-3).

UTIL7-3 Rename File page

Settings

All, AllKit, AllWave, AllPattern, AllTrigger, or

Utility

UTIL7-3≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥Rename≥File

UTIL7-3-1≥<FILE>

Type=All

File type

UTIL7-3-2≥<From>

≥File=ALL_DATA

File name

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB TO

DEVICE port or turn off either the memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 while data is being renamed. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to the memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12

being permanently damaged.

UTIL7-3-3≥≥≥<To>

Name=[MYDATA]

NOTE

≥≥Rename≥File

≥Are≥you≥sure?

Executing...

CAUTION

UTIL7-3≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥Rename≥File

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

Owner’s Manual 97

From the Delete File page, you can delete ﬁles that have been

saved on a USB memory device.

Plug the USB memory device containing the ﬁle(s)

you want to delete into the USB TO DEVICE port on

the side of the DTX-MULTI 12.

Navigate to the Delete File page (UTIL7-4) and press

the [ENTER] button.

The Type page (UTIL7-4-1) will open.

The Type parameter speciﬁes the types of ﬁle to be deleted.

• All ...............All user data – i.e., all User kits, all waves, all

User patterns, all User triggers, and utility set-

tings.

• AllKit ..........All User-kit data

• AllWave.......All wave data

• AllPattern ....All User-pattern data

• AllTrigger....All User-trigger data

• Utility ..........Utility settings

Specify a ﬁle type using the Type parameter, and

press the [ENTER] button.

The File page (UTIL7-4-2) will open.

Select the ﬁle to be deleted using the [-/DEC] and [+/INC]

buttons. Only those ﬁles matching your selection on the Type

page (UTIL7-4-1) will be available for selection.

When you have selected the ﬁle to be deleted, press

the [ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that the ﬁle is to be deleted.

To proceed, press the [ENTER] button.

The following message will be displayed as the data is being

deleted.

When the deletion process has been completed, the message

“Completed.” will be displayed. Following this, the display

will return to the Delete File page (UTIL7-4).

Certain types of USB memory device must be formatted before

they can be used with your DTX-MULTI 12. The correct way to

format such a device is as follows.

• In certain cases, USB memory devices formatted on a computer will

not be recognized by the DTX-MULTI 12. Be sure, therefore, to always

use this instrument to format memory devices that will be used with it.

Plug the USB memory device into the USB TO

DEVICE port on the side of the DTX-MULTI 12.

Navigate to the Format page (UTIL7-5) and press the

[ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that the USB memory device is

to be formatted.

UTIL7-4 Delete File page

Settings

All, AllKit, AllWave, AllPattern, AllTrigger, or

Utility

UTIL7-4≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥Delete≥File

UTIL7-4-1≥<FILE>

Type=All

File type

UTIL7-4-2≥<FILE>

≥File=ALL_DATA

File name

≥≥Delete≥File

≥Are≥you≥sure?

• Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB TO

DEVICE port or turn off either the memory device or the DTX-

MULTI 12 while data is being deleted. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to the memory device or the DTX-MULTI 12

being permanently damaged.

UTIL7-5

Format page

• All data on the USB memory device will be deleted during the

formatting process. Before formatting a memory device, there-

fore, ensure that any important data it contains is backed up.

Executing...

CAUTION

UTIL7-4≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥Delete≥File

UTIL7-5≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥≥≥Format

CAUTION

NOTE

≥≥≥≥Format

≥Are≥you≥sure?

98 Owner’s Manual

UTILITY Setting Area (UTIL)

To proceed, press the [ENTER] button.

The following message will be displayed as the memory

device is being formatted.

When the formatting process has been completed, the mes-

sage “Completed.” will be displayed. Following this, the dis-

play will return to the Format page (UTIL7-5).

From the Memory Info page, you can check the memory-usage

status of a USB memory device. To do so, navigate to the Mem-

ory Info page (UTIL7-6) and press the [ENTER] button.

1 Memory usage ratio (%)

This indicates how much of the USB memory device’s total

memory is currently being used in percentage format.

B Used memory / Total memory

This indicates separately the amount of memory used and the

total memory. The units used here will depend on the corre-

sponding memory size (i.e., KB for kilobytes, MB for mega-

bytes, and GB for gigabytes).

Instrument Reset

In the FACTORY SET section, you can restore all of the DTX-

MULTI 12’s user data (i.e., all User kits, waves, User patterns,

User triggers, and utility parameters) to default settings.

Navigate to the Factory Set page (UTIL8) and

press the [ENTER] button.

You will be asked to conﬁrm that a Factory Set operation is to

be performed.

To proceed, press the [ENTER] button. Alterna-

tively, you can press the [EXIT] button to cancel

the process.

The messages “Executing...” and “Please keep power on.” will

be displayed during the Factory Set process.

When the process has been completed, the message “Com-

pleted.” will be displayed. Following this, the display will

return to the Factory Set page (UTIL8).

• When formatting a USB memory device, it must not be

unplugged from the USB TO DEVICE port and the memory

device and the DTX-MULTI 12 must not be turned off. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to the memory device or the

DTX-MULTI 12 being permanently damaged.

UTIL7-6 Memory Info page

Executing...

CAUTION

UTIL7-5≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥≥≥≥Format

UTIL7-6≥≥≥<FILE>

≥≥Memory≥Info

UTIL7-6-1≥≥≥6.5%

≥≥≥8.4MB/128.0MB

UTIL8 FACTORY SET

• Whenever the instrument is reset in this way, any settings you have

made will be overwritten with the corresponding defaults. All impor-

tant user-deﬁned data should, therefore, be saved on a USB mem-

ory device (see page 93) in advance.

UTIL8

≥≥FACTORY≥SET

CAUTION

≥≥Factory≥Set

≥Are≥you≥sure?

Executing...

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

Owner’s Manual 99

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

This section describes the TRIGGER setting area, which can be accessed by pressing the [SHIFT] and [UTILITY] but-

tons simultaneously. The characteristics of the trigger signals output from pads when they are played depend on a

range of different factors, such as whether sticks or hands are used, and in the case of external pads, the design of the

pads themselves. The TRIGGER setting area allows you to optimize each pad’s trigger signals for processing by the

DTX-MULTI 12 and to save these settings as trigger setup data.

Makeup of TRIGGER Setting Area

The TRIGGER setting area is subdivided into four different sections (TRG1 to TRG4). Use the [

]/[

] buttons to navigate between

these sections. If a section contains parameter-setting pages, the [ENTER] button will light up. Press the [ENTER] button to access these

pages. In certain cases, a number of additional pages may be accessed from a parameter setting page, also using the lit [ENTER] button.

Furthermore, you can press the [EXIT] button to move back towards the top of the setting area.

• Be sure to store any settings that you have edited before turning off the instrument or selecting a new trigger setup. (See page 45.)

CAUTION

TRG1≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

P1:Stick≥Wide

TRG2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

≥≥≥≥≥≥PAD

TRG3

≥≥≥≥≥≥NAME

TRG4

≥≥≥≥COPY≥PAD

TRG1 Select Trigger Setup ........................................................................... Page 100

TRG4-1 Trigger Setup Copy page................................................................. Page 104

TRG2-1 Pad Type page................................................................................. Page 100

TRG2-2 Crosstalk Prevention page .............................................................. Page 102

TRG3-1 Trigger Setup Name page ............................................................... Page 104

Sections

Parameter-setting pages

100 Owner’s Manual

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

Select Trigger Setup

Use these parameters to select the trigger setup that you want to

apply or edit.

A Trigger setup category

Use this parameter to specify either the Preset (P) or User (U)

trigger-setup category.

B Trigger setup number: Trigger setup name

Use these parameters to select the trigger setup that you want

to apply or edit.

P01: Stick Wide ......... Stick-playing trigger setup with a wide

dynamic range, allowing the softness

or hardness of playing to be easily

expressed.

P02: Stick Normal...... Stick-playing trigger setup with a stan-

dard, well-balanced response.

P03: Stick Narrow...... Stick-playing trigger setup with a nar-

row dynamic range for highly-consis-

tent hit detection. With this setup, the

softness or hardness of playing has less

effect, allowing differences in volume

to be smoothed out.

P04: Hand .................. Hand-playing trigger setup.

P05:Finger.................. Hand-playing trigger setup that also

supports ﬁnger-tip playing.

U01 to U10 ................ User triggers.

Freely-conﬁgurable trigger setups for

your own unique triggering needs.

C Input level indicator

Visual representation of the input level for the pad(s) being

struck.

• The Trigger Setup Link page (KIT7-6) can be used to set a complete

trigger setup for the current kit. (See page 52)

Pad Setup

In the PAD section, you can set parameters affecting the sensitiv-

ity, output, and other characteristics of each of your DTX-MULTI

12’s built-in pads and of external pads connected via the PAD

jacks. With the PAD page (TRG2) displayed, press the [ENTER]

button to access the Pad Type (TRG2-1) and Crosstalk Prevention

(TRG2-2) parameter-setting pages. You can use the [B]/[C]

buttons to switch between these pages.

1 Pad

Use this parameter to select the pad(s) to be set.

UPUpper row of built-in rim pads (i.e., 1 to 3)

MIDMiddle rows of built-in pads (i.e., 4 to 9)

LOWLower row of built-in rim pads (i.e., 10 to 12)

01Built-in pad 1

: :

12Built-in pad 12

13External pad connected to PAD M jack

: :

17External pad connected to PAD Q jack

Layout of built-in pads

• Selection by striking is limited to pad groups (i.e., UP, MID, or LOW)

and the external pads (i.e., 13 to 17).

TRG1

Settings P or U

Settings

With “P” (Preset trigger setup) selected:

01 to 05

With “U” (User trigger setup) selected:

01 to 10

TRG1≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

P01:Stick≥Wide

NOTE

TRG2 PAD

TRG2-1 Pad Type page

01 02 03 UP

04 05 06

MID

07 08 09

10 11 12 LOW

Settings UP, MID, LOW, or 01 to 17

TRG2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

≥≥≥≥≥≥PAD

TRG2-1≥-MID-≥≥˛¸

Type=StickDyna

Front panel

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

Owner’s Manual

101

Pad type

Use this parameter to set a pad type for the pad(s) indicated

. Listed below, the available options will depend on

whether you selected one or more of the built-in pads (i.e.,

UP, MID, LOW, or 01 to 12) or one of the external pads (i.e.,

13 to 17) using

above.

Input level indicator

Visual representation of the input level for the pad(s) being

struck.

With a pad and pad type selected on the Pad Type page (TRG2-1),

press the [ENTER] button to access the ﬁve parameter setting

pages (TRG2-1-1 to TRG2-1-5) for that pad type’s trigger setup.

You can navigate between these pages using the [

]/[

] but-

tons.

• If you have selected the UP, MID, or LOW group of pads, the values ini-

tially shown on each parameter-setting page will correspond to those

for Pad 4 and 10, respectively. In such a case, furthermore, changes

made to any parameter will affect all pads in the group.

• The pad indicator and input level indicator shown on the upper row of

text on the ﬁve parameter-setting pages (TRG2-1-1 to TRG2-1-5) are

identical to those from the Pad Type page (TRG2-1). Accordingly, they

are not covered in the following page descriptions.

• If one or more of the built-in pads are set to “HandDyna”, “HandNorm”,

or “HandR”, the Hand icon ( ) will be displayed on the Select Kit

page (KIT1).

TRG2-1-1

Input Gain page

Gain

Use this parameter to set the level of gain (or ampliﬁcation)

that is applied to the input signal from the selected pad(s)

before it is converted into a trigger signal. With a high setting,

all input signals above a certain level will be ampliﬁed to the

same level (i.e., the maximum level). This means that varia-

tions in the softness or hardness with which the pad is struck

can be smoothed out. Meanwhile, when a low setting is used,

the softness or hardness of playing will be reﬂected to a much

greater degree in the output trigger signal, allowing for more

expressive performances.

TRG2-1-2

Velocity Curve page

Velocity curve (VelCurve)

Use this parameter to select a velocity curve for the selected

pad(s). A velocity curve determines how the relative strength

of playing affects the signal produced. For example, with the

“loud2” velocity curve shown below, relatively loud sounds

(i.e., high velocities) can be produced even with softer play-

ing. In contrast, the “hard2” curve only produces loud sounds

when the pad in question is struck quite hard.

TRG2-1-3

Input Level Range page

Level

Use this parameter to set the range of input signals (in per-

centage format) that will be converted into trigger signals.

Any input signals at the minimum level or lower will not be

converted into a trigger signal, and therefore, will not produce

any sound. Meanwhile, input signals at the maximum level or

higher will result in trigger signals with the maximum veloc-

ity as set on the Velocity Range page (TRG2-1-4).

Settings

For built-in pads

StickDyna, StickNorm, StickNarrow,

HandDyna, HandNorm, or Hand

For external pads

KP125W/125, KP65, XP120/100Sn, XP120/

100Tm, TP120/100Sn, TP120/100Tm,

TP65S Snare, TP65S Tom, TP65S HiHat,

TP65, PCY155, PCY135, PCY150S,

PCY130SC, PCY130S/130, PCY65S/65,

RHH135, RHH130, DT Snare, DT HiTom,

DT LoTom, DT Kick, TRG Snare 1, TRG

Snare 2, TRG Snare 3, TRG HiTom 1, TRG

HiTom 2, TRG LoTom 1, TRG LoTom 2, TRG

Kick 1, or TRG Kick 2

Settings

0 to 63

NOTE

ˇÁ

TRG2-1-1≥-MID-˛¸

≥≥≥≥Gain=30

Settings

loud2, loud1, normal, hard1, or hard2

Settings

Minimum level: 0% to 99%

Maximum level: 1% to 100%

TRG2-1-2≥-MID-˛¸

VelCurve=normal

loud2 loud1 norm hard1 hard2

Velocity

Tr igger input level (i.e., strength of playing) →

TRG2-1-3≥-MID-˛¸

Level=≥≥≥0%-100%

102 Owner’s Manual

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

TRG2-1-4 Velocity Range page

1 Velocity

Use these parameters to specify the maximum and minimum

velocities corresponding to the settings made on the Input

Level Range page (TRG2-1-3). When struck, the selected

pad(s) will produce sounds within this velocity range.

TRG2-1-5 Double Trigger Prevention page

When a stick or beater strikes a pad, it may rebound and strike

again, producing a second trigger signal and causing a voice to

sound twice. The term “double trigger” is used to refer to this

phenomenon. A reject-time setting is used to prevent double trig-

gers from occurring, and the DTX-MULTI 12 will reject any sec-

ond input signals produced during this time period.

1 Reject time

Use this parameter to specify the time period after a pad is

struck during which a second input signal will be ignored.

The larger the value set here, the longer the period during

which a second sound will not be produced.

• Double triggers may not be rejected in cases where the pad-type

selection on the Pad Type page (TRG2-1) is other than a DT-series

pad and the input level of the second strike within the reject time is at

least twice that of the ﬁrst strike.

The term “crosstalk” refers to the output of trigger signals from a

pad other than the one that was stuck as a result of vibration or

interference between pads. From the Crosstalk Prevention page,

you can set input levels below which trigger signals will not be

produced, thus preventing crosstalk. With this page displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to access the Global Crosstalk Level

page (TRG2-2-1) and the Individual Crosstalk Level page

(TRG2-2-2). You can switch between these parameter-setting

pages using the [

]/[

] buttons.

• The input level indicator shown on the upper row of text on the

crosstalk level pages (TRG2-2-1, TRG2-2-2) is identical to that from

the Pad Type page (TRG2-1). Accordingly, it is not covered in the fol-

lowing page descriptions.

TRG2-2-1 Global Crosstalk Level page

1 Pad

Use this parameter to select the pad(s) for which a crosstalk

level is to be set. You can also strike a pad to select it.

• Selection by striking is limited to pad groups (i.e., UP, MID, or LOW)

and the external pads (i.e., 13 to 17).

B Crosstalk level

Use this parameter to specify a level for preventing crosstalk

from all of the DTX-MULTI 12’s other pads. If the input level

produced at the pad indicated by 1 is lower than this level

whenever any of the other pads are struck, it will be treated as

crosstalk and no trigger signal will be generated. Although

higher setting values are more effective in preventing

crosstalk, they can also make it difﬁcult to play multiple pads

at the same time.

Settings

Minimum velocity: 0 to 126

Maximum velocity: 1 to 127

Settings 4ms to 500ms

TRG2-1-4≥-MID-˛¸

Velocity=≥≥0-127

TRG2-1-5≥-MID-˛¸

RejectTime=500ms

NOTE

TRG2-2 Crosstalk Prevention page

Settings UP, MID, LOW, or 01 to 17

Settings 0% to 99%

TRG2-2≥≥≥≥≥≥≥≥˛¸

≥≥≥Crosstalk

NOTE

TRG2-2-1≥-¡£-≥˛¸

Level=≥25%(ALL)

NOTE

TRIGGER ReferenceKITMIDI VOICEUTILITY WAVEPATTERN

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

Owner’s Manual 103

TRG2-2-2 Individual Crosstalk Level page

1 Pad

Use this parameter to select the pad(s) for which a crosstalk

level is to be set. You can also strike a pad to select it.

• Selection by striking is limited to pad groups (i.e., UP, MID, or LOW)

and the external pads (i.e., 13 to 17).

B Crosstalk source

Use this parameter to specify a pad or group of pads causing

crosstalk in the pad(s) indicated by 1. You can also strike a

pad to select it.

C Crosstalk level

Use this parameter to specify a level for preventing crosstalk

from the pad(s) indicated by 2. If the input level produced at

the pad indicated by 1 is lower than this level whenever the

pad indicated by 2 is struck, it will be treated as crosstalk

and no trigger signal will be generated. Although higher set-

ting values are more effective in preventing crosstalk, they

can also make it difﬁcult to play multiple pads at the same

time.

Settings UP, MID, LOW, or 01 to 17

Settings 0% to 99%

Typical Examples of Crosstalk-

Prevention Setup – No. 1

● Use this approach when pad sensitivity is set

to allow playing by hand and striking of one of

the pads from the MID group (i.e., 4 to 9)

causes another pad from that group to pro-

duce a sound.

Navigate to the Individual Crosstalk Level page

(TRG2-2-2) and set its parameters as follows.

1: MID (i.e., pads 4 to 9), 2: MID (i.e., pads 4 to 9)

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [UP/

DOWN] button to activate the input lock. (

will change to .)

• The input lock must be activated here to prevent the selection

from changing when one of the other pads from the MID group

(i.e., 4 to 9) is struck in the next step.

TRG2-2-2≥-¡¢-≥˛¸

Level=≥25%(¡£)

NOTE

-MID-

[MID]

NOTE

While striking one of the pads from the MID

group (i.e., 4 to 9), raise the level indicated by 3

until other pads from that group no longer pro-

duce any sound.

Press the [STORE] button to open the Trigger

Store page, and then store your trigger setup as

described on page 45.

Typical Examples of Crosstalk-

Prevention Setup – No. 2

● Use this approach when pad sensitivity is set

to allow playing by hand and, for example,

striking of Pad 4 also results in Pad 5 produc-

ing a sound

Navigate to the Individual Crosstalk Level page

(TRG2-2-2) and set its parameters as follows.

1: 05 (i.e., Pad 5), 2: 04 (i.e., Pad 4)

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [UP/

DOWN] button to activate the input lock. (

will change to .)

• The input lock must be activated here to prevent the selection

changing from Pad 5 to Pad 4 when Pad 4 is struck in the next

step.

While striking Pad 4, raise the level indicated by

3 until Pad 5 no longer causes a voice to play

(i.e., no longer produces a trigger signal).

• If this level is set too high, Pad 5 may not produce any sound

when struck relatively softly together with Pad 4.

Press the [STORE] button to open the Trigger

Store page, and then store your trigger setup as

described on page 45.

TRG2-2-2≥[MID]˛¸

Level=≥28%(MID)

-º∞-

[º∞]

NOTE

TRG2-2-2≥[º∞]≥˛¸

Level=≥28%(04)

104 Owner’s Manual

TRIGGER Setting Area (TRG)

Trigger Setup Names

In the NAME section, you can assign a name of up to 12 charac-

ters in length to trigger setups. With the NAME page displayed,

press the [ENTER] button to open the Trigger Setup Name page

(TRG3-1).

On this page, you can assign a name of up to 12 characters in

length to the current trigger setup. Use the [

]/[

] buttons

to move the ﬂashing cursor to the character you want to

change, and then select a character using the [-/DEC] and [+/

INC] buttons. The following characters can be used in pattern

names.

[space]

Copy Trigger Parameters

In the COPY PAD section, you can copy and replace data for the

currently selected trigger setup on a pad-speciﬁc basis. With the

COPY PAD page displayed, press the [ENTER] button to open

the Trigger Setup Copy page (TRG4-1).

1 Pad to copy

Use this parameter to set the pad whose settings are to be cop-

ied. You can also strike a pad to select it.

B Pad to replace

Use this parameter to set the pad whose settings are to be

replaced. You can also strike a pad to select it.

• Copying of trigger setup data can only be carried out between the

built-in pads (1 to 12) or between the external pads (13 to 17). If you

attempt to copy between a built-in pad and an external pad, the above

parameters will be automatically changed (to Pad 1 or Pad 13) in order

to prevent this from occurring.

When you have selected the pads to copy and replace, press the

[ENTER] button. When asked to conﬁrm that you wish to pro-

ceed, press the [ENTER] button once again to do so.

Be sure, therefore, to use the [STORE] button to access the Trig-

ger Store page and save important information in the instrument’s

internal memory in advance (see page 45).

TRG3 NAME

TRG3-1 Trigger Setup Name page

TRG3

≥≥≥≥≥≥NAME

TRG3-1

≥[HandPercus≥≥]

Tr igger setup name

!"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}ßå

TRG4 COPY PAD

TRG4-1 Trigger Setup Copy page

Settings 01 to 17

• Whenever trigger-setup data is copied, all of the trigger-setup data

for the pad indicated by 2 will be replaced.

TRG4

≥≥≥≥COPY≥PAD

TRG4-1≥≥≥≥<COPY>

≥≥º¡≥≥≥-ß≥≥º™

1 2

NOTE

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 105

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Check your system’s connections as follows.

● Ensure that headphones or an external audio system, such as

an ampliﬁer and speakers, are correctly connected (See page

10.)

● Ensure that the cables you are using are in good condition.

Check the following and ensure that their respective vol-

ume levels are not too low.

● The ampliﬁer and/or speakers connected to the DTX-MULTI 12.

● The VOLUME dial on the front panel. (See page 8.)

● The Volume page for the current kit ([KIT] → KIT2 → KIT2-1).

(See page 47.)

● The Voice Volume page for the voices assigned to each of the

pads ([VOICE] → VCE2 → VCE2-2). (See page 57.)

● The Master Volume page for the entire instrument ([UTILITY] →

UTIL1 → UTIL1-1). (See page 83.)

Check your trigger settings as follows.

● Open the Select Trigger Setup page ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] →

TRG1) and ensure that the trigger setup is suitable for your

playing style and any external pads being used. (See page

100.)

● Open the Input Gain and Velocity Curve pages for each of the

pads’ triggers ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 →

TRG2-1-1, TRG2-1-2) and ensure that the Gain and VelCurve

parameters are set appropriately. (See page 101.)

● Open the Input Level Range page for each of the pads’ triggers

([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-3) and

ensure that the lower setting for the Level parameter is not set

too high. At high settings, pads may not produce sounds. (See

page 101.)

Check your effect and ﬁlter settings.

● It is important to remember that ﬁlters, by their very nature,

cause all sound to be silenced at certain cutoff-frequency set-

tings.

● Open the Attack Time and Decay Time pages for the voices

assigned to each of the pads ([VOICE] → VCE3 → VCE3-1,

VCE3-2) and ensure that the Attack and Decay parameters are

not set in such a way that voices are being silenced. (See page

58.)

Check your MIDI settings as follows.

● Open the MIDI Message page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1) and ensure that “note” is selected. No sound will be pro-

duced for any other setting on this page.

● After conﬁrming that the pads are set to play notes on the MIDI

Message page (see above), open the Select Voice page

([VOICE] → VCE1) and ensure that a voice other than “no

assign” is selected. Pads set to “no assign” will not produce any

sound. (See page 56, 62.)

● Open the Velocity Limits page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1 → MIDI1-6) and ensure that the lower setting for the Vel-

Limit parameter is not too high. At high settings, pads will pro-

duce sound only when struck very hard. (See page 64.)

● Open the Trigger Velocity page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1 → MIDI1-7) and ensure that the setting for the TrgVel

parameter is not too small (resulting in low volumes). (See page

64.)

● Open the Local Control page ([UTILITY] → UTIL6 → UTIL6-5)

and ensure that the LocalCtrl parameter is set to “on”. (See

page 90.)

● Open the MIDI Note page for each of the pads ([MIDI] → MIDI1

→ MIDI1-2) and ensure that all layers are not turned off. (See

page 63.)

Check your pad settings as follows.

● Open the Pad Function page for each of the pads ([UTILITY] →

UTIL4 → UTIL4-1) and ensure that the Func parameter is set to

“off”. (See page 88.)

● Open the Pad 10-12 Switch page ([UTILITY] → UTIL4 →

UTIL4-3) and ensure that the Pad10-12 parameter is set to

“enable”. (See page 89.)

Check the following if no sound is produced by external

tone generators.

● Ensure that MIDI cables have been correctly connected. (See

page 12.)

● Open the MIDI In/Out page ([UTILITY] → UTIL6 → UTIL6-9)

and ensure that the correct interface has been set for sending

MIDI data. If the MIDI IN/OUT parameter is set to “USB”, MIDI

data will not be sent to external MIDI devices connected via

MIDI cables. (See page 91.)

● Ensure that the DTX-MULTI 12 is sending data on the MIDI

channel that the external tone generator is set to receive it on.

For details regarding settings within the MIDI setting area, see

page 61. In addition, see page 76 for more details regarding

MIDI settings related to pattern playback.

● Open the External MIDI Switch page ([MIDI] → MIDI2 → MIDI2-

2) and ensure that the MIDI Switch parameter is set to “on”.

When the external MIDI switch is turned off, MIDI messages will

not be sent, and therefore, you will not be able to play external

MIDI devices using your DTX-MULTI 12. (See page 66.)

● Ensure that a pad function has not been assigned to the pads in

question. To do so, open the Pad Function page for each of the

pads ([UTILITY] → UTIL4 → UTIL4-1) and ensure that the Func

parameter is set to “off”. No internal or external sound will be

produced by any pad with a function assignment. (See page

88.)

● Open the Pad 10-12 Switch page ([UTILITY] → UTIL4 →

UTIL4-3) and ensure that the Pad10-12 parameter is set to

“enable”. (See page 89.)

● Open the MIDI Message page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1) and ensure that “note” is selected. No internal or exter-

nal sound will be produced for any other setting on this page.

(See page 62.)

● Open the Velocity Limits page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1 → MIDI1-6) and ensure that the lower setting for the Vel-

Limit parameter is not too high. At high settings, pads will pro-

duce sound only when struck very hard. (See page 64.)

● Open the Input Level Range page for each of the pads’ triggers

([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-3) and

ensure that the lower setting for the Level parameter is not set

too high. At high settings, pads may not produce sounds. (See

page 101.)

No sound is produced by striking pads or the volume

is lower than expected.

106 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Check the following if unexpected sounds are produced

when playing an external tone generator.

● Access the external instrument’s MIDI channel settings and

ensure that they match the MIDI channel on which the DTX-

MULTI 12 is sending data.

Check the following if all of the pads are producing sounds

at very high volumes (or high velocities).

● Open the Input Gain page for each pad ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] →

TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-1) and ensure that the Gain

parameter is not set too high. (See page 101.)

● Open the Velocity Curve page for each pad ([SHIFT] + [UTIL-

ITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-2) and ensure that the Vel-

Curve parameter is set appropriately. (See page 101.)

● Open the Trigger Velocity page for each of the pads ([MIDI] →

MIDI1 → MIDI1-7) and ensure that the TrgVel parameter is set

appropriately. If, for example, this parameter is set to “127”, high

velocities will be produced even when the pad is struck lightly.

(See page 64.)

● Ensure that you are using only the recommended Yamaha

external pads. Products from other manufacturers can output

excessively large signals.

Check the following if sounds output from the DTX-MULTI

12 appear to be distorted.

● Ensure that effects have been set appropriately. Sound can be

distorted with certain combinations of effect type and parameter

settings. (See pages 48, 49, 50, 59, 68, 78.)

● Open the Filter page for the voices assigned to each of the pads

([VOICE] → VCE3 → VCE3-4) and ensure that ﬁlters have been

setup appropriately. Depending on the type of sound being ﬁl-

tered, certain resonance settings (Q) can produce distortion.

(See page 58.)

● Ensure that the MASTER dial is not set to too high a volume,

causing clipping to occur.

Check the following if voices play endlessly and do not stop.

● Open the Receive Key-Off page ([MIDI] → MIDI1 → MIDI1-5)

and check the setting for the RcvKeyOff parameter. If set to

“off”, certain types of voice will play endlessly when triggered.

(See page 64.) You can silence all voices at any time by holding

down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [MIDI] button.

Check the following if sounds stop unexpectedly during

rolls and ﬂams.

● Open the Playing Mode and MIDI Note pages ([MIDI] → MIDI1

→ MIDI1-1, MIDI1-2) for the pads in question and check their

settings. Delete any unnecessary note assignments for stack or

alternate playing.

● Open the Mono/Poly page ([VOICE] → VCE5 → VCE5-1) and

ensure that the Mono/Poly parameter is set to “poly”. (See page

60.)

● Open the Double Trigger Prevention page for the pad in ques-

tion ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-5)

and reduce the setting for the RejectTime parameter. (See page

102.)

Check the following if no sound is produced when the

pads are played by hand.

● Open the Select Trigger Setup page ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] →

TRG1) and ensure that “P04:Hand” or “P05:Finger is selected.

(See page 100.)

● Open the Pad Type page for each pad ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] →

TRG2 → TRG2-1) and ensure that the Type parameter is set for

playing by hand. (See page 100.)

Check the following if the DTX-MULTI 12 sounds out of

tune or seems to be playing the wrong note.

● Open the Master Tune page ([UTILITY] → UTIL1 → UTIL1-2)

and ensure that the setting for the M.Tune parameter is not too

far removed from “0”. (See page 83.)

● If you are concerned about the pitch of a wave, open the Voice

Tuning page for that wave ([VOICE] → VCE2 → VCE2-1) and

ensure that the setting for the Tune parameter is not too far

removed from “+ 0.00”. (See page 57.)

● If you are concerned about the pitch of a pattern, open the

Transpose page for that pattern ([VOICE] → VCE2 → VCE2-1)

and ensure that the setting for the Transpose parameter is not

too far removed from “+ 0”. (See page 57.)

Check the following if effects produce no changes in the

sound.

● Ensure that none of the effect bypass switches have been

turned on. (See page 83.)

● Open the Effect Bypass page for the entire instrument ([UTIL-

ITY] → UTIL1 → UTIL1-6), and ensure that the applied effects

have not been bypassed. (See page 83.)

● Open the Master EQ Bypass page ([UTILITY] → UTIL3 →

UTIL3-3) and ensure that the MEQ Bypass parameter is set to

“off”. (See page 87.)

● Open the Variation Send, Chorus Send, and Reverb Send

pages for individual voices ([VOICE] → VCE4 → VCE4-1,

VCE4-2, VCE4-3) and ensure that appropriate effect-send lev-

els are set on each. (See page 59.)

● Open the Chorus Send and Reverb Send pages for the cur-

rently selected kit ([KIT] → KIT3 → KIT3-1, KIT3-2) and ensure

that appropriate effect-send levels are set on each. (See page

48.)

Check the following if pattern playback does not start

when the [

] button is pressed.

● Ensure that an empty pattern has not been selected.

● Open the MIDI Sync page ([UTILITY] → UTIL6 → UTIL6-6) and

conﬁrm that MIDI Sync is set as required. If this parameter is set

to “ext”, patterns will only playback when MIDI Clock messages

are being received from an external MIDI sequencer or com-

puter; meanwhile, if MIDI Sync is set to “auto”, playback will be

synchronized to MIDI Clock messages whenever they are

received. (See page 91.)

Perform the following if a pattern loops endlessly and does

not stop.

● Silence all voices by holding down the [SHIFT] button and

pressing the [MIDI] button. This action can be performed at any

time.

Note the following regarding wave playback speeds.

● Waves have ﬁxed tempos. They will always play at the tempo of

the original imported ﬁle regardless of the drum kit tempo and

other similar settings.

Carry out the following if the value is displayed as “---” and

cannot be changed.

● Open the Pad Function page (UTIL4-1) for the pad in question

and ensure that the Func parameter is set to “off”. (See page

88.)

● Open the MIDI Note page (MIDI1-2) for the pad in question and

ensure that the Note parameter for all layers (A to D) is not set

to “off”. (See page 63.)

Check the following if pads 10 to 12 cannot be set.

● Open the Pad 10-12 Switch page ([UTILITY] → UTIL4 →

UTIL4-3) and ensure that the Pad10-12 parameter is set to

“enable”. (See page 89.)

Sounds do not stop, are distorted, or are intermittent

and stuttered, etc.

Values cannot be set or buttons do nothing when

pressed, etc.

Troubleshooting

Owner’s Manual 107

Appendix

Perform the following if multiple sounds are produced by

the struck pad (i.e., if double triggers are being produced).

● If your external pads and triggers feature output or sensitivity

controllers, reduce the output or sensitivity to a more appropri-

ate level.

● Open the Input Gain page for the pad’s trigger ([SHIFT] + [UTIL-

ITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-1) and ensure that the

Gain parameter is not set too high. (See page 101.)

● Ensure that you are using only the recommended Yamaha drum

triggers or trigger sensors. Products from other manufacturers

can output excessively large signals, which in turn can result in

double triggering.

● Ensure that the heads are not vibrating in an irregular manner,

muting them if so required.

● Ensure that drum triggers are attached in the vicinity of the rim

and not near the center of the head.

● Ensure that no other objects are coming into contact with the

drum trigger.

● Open the Double Trigger Prevention page for the pad(s) in ques-

tion ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-5)

and increase the setting for the RejectTime parameter. Avoid

setting too large a reject time, as this can make it impossible to

accurately detect ﬂams, rolls, and the like. (See page 102.)

Perform the following if sounds are also produced by pads

other than the one that was struck (i.e., if crosstalk is

occurring).

● Carry out the steps described in the section Typical Example of

Crosstalk-Prevention Setup on page 103.

● Open the Global Crosstalk Level and Individual Crosstalk Level

pages ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-2 → TRG2-2-1,

TRG2-2-2) and ensure that the Level parameters are set appro-

priately. (See pages 102, 103.)

● If using a separately-sold pad featuring a level adjuster, ensure

that it is set appropriately.

● Open the Input Level Range page for the pad(s) in question

([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-3) and

ensure that the lower setting for the Level parameter is set to an

appropriate value. (See page 101.)

● If playing by hand, open the Select Trigger Setup page ([SHIFT]

+ [UTILITY] → TRG1) and ensure that a suitable trigger setup is

selected for the drum kit. (See page 100.)

● If playing with sticks, open the Pad Type page for the pad(s) in

question ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1) and ensure

that the Type parameter is not set for playing by hand. (See

page 100.)

Perform the following if only one voice is produced even

though two pads are struck simultaneously.

● Open the Input Gain page for the pad not producing a sound

([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-1) and

increase the setting for the Gain parameter. (See page 101.)

● Open the Input Level Range page for the pad not producing a

sound ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1 → TRG2-1-3)

and reduce the lower setting for the Level parameter. (See page

101.)

● Open the Alternate Group page for each of the pads ([VOICE]

→ VCE5 → VCE5-2) and ensure that they are not assigned to

the same alternate group. (See page 60.)

● Open the Trigger Alternate Group page for each of the pads

([MIDI] → MIDI1 → MIDI1-9) and ensure that TrgAltGrp is set to

“off” for both. (See page 65.)

Perform the following checks if consistent, reliable trigger

signals cannot be produced using an acoustic drum.

● Ensure that a high-quality drum trigger, such as the DT20, is

secured ﬁrmly in place using adhesive tape. (Remember to

remove any old tape.)

● Carry out the checks listed above in the above section No sound

is produced by striking pads or the volume is lower than

expected.

● Ensure that the signal cable is securely plugged into the jack on

the DT20 or other drum trigger.

Check the following if closed hi-hat sounds cannot be

played.

● Open the Pad Type page ([SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → TRG2 →

TRG2-1) and ensure that a suitable type has been selected. If

you are using a Yamaha RHH130 or RHH135 hi-hat controller,

the pad type must be set to either “RHH130” or “RHH135”. (See

page 100.)

Check the following if edge and cup sounds cannot be

played or the choking technique does not work when

using a cymbal pad.

● Open the Pad Type page for the connected cymbal pad ([SHIFT]

+ [UTILITY] → TRG2 → TRG2-1) and ensure that a suitable

cymbal-pad type has been selected. (See page 100.)

Perform the following checks if hi-hat splash sounds can-

not be played.

● Ensure that the foot controller is connected via the HI-HAT

CONTROL jack.

● Open the Splash Sensitivity page ([UTILITY] → UTIL5 →

UTIL5-2) and ensure that the SplashSens parameter is set to a

suitable level. Note that hi-hat splash sounds will not be pro-

duced if “off” has been set here. (See page 89.)

Check the following if a foot switch connected via the

FOOT SW jack is not working properly.

● You may have connected the foot switch with the DTX-MULTI 12

already turned on. Ensure that you always connect foot

switches before turning on the instrument.

● Ensure that the Panel Lock is turned off. (See page 8.)

● Ensure that the Cubase Remote function is turned off. (See

page 15.)

● Ensure that the USB memory device has been correctly format-

ted. (See page 97.)

● Ensure that the USB memory device has not been write-pro-

tected. (See page 12.)

● Ensure that there is sufﬁcient free space on the USB memory

device to save the data in question. To conﬁrm how much mem-

ory is available for saving data, open the Memory Info page

([UTILITY] → UTIL7 → UTIL7-6). (See page 98.)

● If you are using USB cables, ensure that they are connected

correctly. (See page 13.)

● Open the MIDI In/Out page ([UTILITY] → UTIL6 → UTIL6-9)

and check the current setting. If you want to exchange MIDI

data with a computer via USB, ensure that the MIDI IN/OUT

parameter is set to “USB”. Alternatively, if you want to exchange

MIDI data with external devices via MIDI cables, ensure that this

parameter is set to “MIDI”. (See page 91.)

Multiple sounds are produced when a single pad is

struck.

Optional add-on products do not operate as expected.

Perform the following if nothing happens when but-

tons on the front panel are pressed.

Carry out the following checks if data cannot be

saved on a USB memory device.

Check the following if MIDI data cannot be exchanged

with a computer or external MIDI device.

108 Owner’s Manual

On-screen Messages

Message Full meaning

Are you sure?

This message is displayed to conﬁrm whether or not you wish to proceed with the selected opera-

tion.

Choose user pattern.

This message is displayed if you attempt to perform a pattern management task even though a Pre-

set pattern is currently selected. Select a User pattern to proceed with the operation in question.

Completed.

This message is displayed when loading, saving, formatting, and other similar operations have been

completed.

Connecting USB device... This message is displayed when the instrument is busy mounting a USB memory device.

Copy protected.

This message is displayed if operations such as wave editing cannot be performed due to the digital

audio source being copy protected.

Executing...

This message is displayed while the instrument is busy performing formatting or another similar

management task. Please wait until the operation is completed.

File already exists.

This message is displayed if a ﬁle with the same name as the one you are about to save already

exists.

File not found. This message is displayed if no ﬁle of the selected type exists.

Illegal ﬁle.

This message is displayed if the ﬁle selected for loading is unsuitable either for use with the instru-

ment or for the current setting area.

Illegal ﬁle name. This message is displayed if the speciﬁed ﬁle name is not valid.

Illegal format.

This message is displayed if the standard MIDI ﬁle (SMF) you are attempting to import is of Format

1. Please select an SMF of Format 0 to proceed.

Illegal selection.

This message is displayed if an operation cannot be performed in accordance with the settings

made.

Illegal wave data. This message is displayed if the audio ﬁle you are attempting to import is of an unsupported format.

Incompatible USB device.

This message is displayed if an unsupported USB device is plugged into the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE port.

Invalid USB device.

This message is displayed if the plugged-in USB memory device is not usable in its current condi-

tion. As long as the device contains no irreplaceable data, it should be formatted to make it usable.

MIDI buffer full. This message is displayed if the amount of MIDI data received is too large to process.

MIDI data error. This message is displayed if an error occurs while receiving MIDI data.

No data.

This message is displayed if you are attempting to perform a pattern management task even though

the selected pattern contains no data.

No response from USB device. This message is displayed if the plugged-in USB memory device fails to respond.

No wave data.

This message is displayed to you are attempting to perform a wave management task even though

no wave data exists.

No unused MIDI note.

This message is displayed upon execution of a copy-pad operation if no unused MIDI notes are

available.

Now importing... [EXIT] to cancel. This message is displayed while the instrument is busy importing wave data.

Now loading... [EXIT] to cancel. This message is displayed while the instrument is busy loading a ﬁle.

Now recording... This message is displayed while the instrument is busy recording a pattern.

Now saving... [EXIT] to cancel. This message is displayed while the instrument is busy saving a ﬁle.

Now working...

This message is displayed while the instrument is tidying up after importing a wave or after you

press the [EXIT] button to cancel a load or save operation.

Overwrite?

This message is displayed when saving ﬁles to conﬁrm whether or not you wish to overwrite a ﬁle of

the same name already present on the USB memory device.

Pattern stored. This message is displayed to conﬁrm that the selected pattern has been successfully stored.

Please keep power on.

This message is displayed while the instrument is busy writing data to its ﬂash ROM. The instrument

should never be turned off while in this state. If this precaution is not observed, user data may be

lost or the internal system may be damaged, rendering the instrument unable to startup normally

when it is next turned on.

On-screen Messages

Owner’s Manual 109

Appendix

Please stop sequencer.

This message is displayed to remind you to stop pattern playback before performing the selected

operation.

Read only ﬁle. This message is displayed if you are attempting to perform a ﬁle operation using a read-only ﬁle.

Sample is protected. This message is displayed if the selected audio ﬁle is write protected and cannot be overwritten.

Sample is too long. This message is displayed if the audio ﬁle is too long to be loaded.

Sample is too short. This message is displayed if the audio ﬁle is too short to be loaded.

Seq data is not empty.

This message is displayed upon activating Record Mode if no empty patterns are available for

recording.

Seq memory full.

This message is displayed if the instrument’s internal memory for sequence data is full, making it

impossible to perform record new patterns, perform associated management tasks, or load data

from a USB memory device. To free up some of this sequence memory, delete unneeded User pat-

terns.

System memory crashed.

This message is displayed if a problem occurred while writing data to the instrument’s internal ﬂash

ROM.

USB connection terminated.

This message is displayed if connection with a USB memory device was lost due to the occurrence

of an abnormal electric current. Unplug the USB memory device and press the [ENTER] button to

return.

USB device full.

This message is displayed if a USB -memory device is full and no more ﬁles can be saved on it. In

such a case, use a new USB memory device or make space by erasing unwanted data from the cur-

rent device.

USB device not ready.

This message is displayed if a USB memory device has not been correctly plugged into the instru-

ment.

USB device read/write error.

This message is displayed if an error occurred during the exchange of data with a USB memory

device.

USB device write protected.

This message is displayed if the USB memory device is write protected or if you are attempting to

save data on a read-only device such as a CD drive.

Excessive demand for USB

power.

This message is displayed if the current being drawn by the USB memory device exceeds the level

supported by the instrument.

USB transmission error. This message is displayed if an error occurred during communication with the USB memory device.

Wave memory full.

This message is displayed if the instrument’s wave memory is full, preventing operations such as the

importing and loading of data.

Wave stored. This message is displayed to conﬁrm that the selected wave has been successfully stored.

Utility stored. This message is displayed to conﬁrm that utility settings have been successfully stored.

Message Full meaning

110 Owner’s Manual

Speciﬁcations

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify prod-

ucts or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. As speciﬁcations, compatible equipment, and optional extras may not be the same in every

region, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Pad section Built-in pads 12

External inputs 5 (three-zone x 1; monaural x 4)

Tone generator Maximum polyphony 64 notes

Wave memory

Voices

100 MB (16-bit linear conversion)

Drum and percussion: 1,061

Keyboard: 216

Drum kits

Preset: 50

User-deﬁned: 200

Effects Variation x 42 types; Chorus x 6 types; Reverb x 6 types: 5-band master equalizer

Trigger section

Pad functions

Increment or decrement of drum kit, pattern, or tempo; tap tempo; switching on or off of

click-track; transmission of control change messages

Waves Readable quantity 500

Bit depth 16 bit

Wave memory 64 MB

Maximum size

Mono sample: 2 MB

Stereo sample: 4 MB

Sample formats Proprietary, WAV, and AIFF

Sequencer Sequence capacity 152,000 notes

Note resolution Quarter note / 480

Recording method Real-time overdubbing

Patterns

Preset patterns: 128 phrases (including 3 demo patterns)

User-deﬁned patterns: 50 phrases

Sequence formats

Proprietary

SMF Format 0 (for loading only)

Click-track Tempo 30 to 300 BPM. Tap tempo functionality

Beats 1/4 – 16/4, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/16 – 16/16

Note timing Accent notes, quarter notes, eight notes, sixteenth notes, triplets

Other Display Backlit LCD with 2 rows of 16 characters

Connectors

PAD

M jack (standard stereo-phone plug; left = trigger, right = rim switch)

PAD N/O and PAD P/Q jacks (standard stereo-phone plug; left = trigger, right = trigger)

HI-HAT CONTROL jack (standard stereo-phone plug)

FOOT SW jack (standard stereo-phone plug)

OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks (standard phone plugs)

PHONES jack (standard stereo-phone plug), AUX IN jack (standard stereo-phone plug),

MIDI IN and OUT connectors, USB TO HOST port, USB TO DEVICE port, and DC IN.

Power Consumption

9W (DTXM12 and PA-5D adaptor)

6W (DTXM12 and PA-150 adaptor)

Size and weight 345 (w) x 319 (d) x 96 (h) mm; 3.3 kg

Package Contents

Power adaptor (PA-5D/PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha),

Owner’s Manual (this booklet), Data List booklet, DVD-ROM

Owner’s Manual 111

Appendix

Index

Symbols

F Standby/On switch ......... 9, 10, 11

F Switch ............................. 9, 10, 11

[+/INC] button ................................... 9

[-/DEC] button .................................. 9

[B] [D] [C] buttons ................ 8, 44

[EE

] button ................................. 8, 86

[ENTER] button .......................... 8, 45

[EXIT] button .............................. 8, 45

[KIT] button .......................... 8, 44, 46

[MIDI] button ........................ 8, 44, 61

[PTN] button ......................... 8, 44, 74

[SHIFT] button ........................... 8, 44

[STORE] button ......................... 8, 45

[UTILITY] button .................. 8, 44, 82

[VOICE] button ..................... 8, 44, 55

[WAVE] button ..................... 8, 44, 69

Accent note number (NoteAcc) ...... 85

Alternate group .............................. 60

AltGroup ......................................... 60

Attack time ..................................... 58

AUX IN jack ..................................... 9

Auxiliary output selection ............... 84

AuxOutSel ...................................... 84

Bandwidth ...................................... 87

Bank select LSB ................ 66, 67, 77

Bank select MSB ............... 66, 67, 77

Built-in pads ................................... 28

Button .............................................. 8

CCNo (Control change number) 65, 68

Ch (MIDI channel) .. 66, 67, 68, 76, 77

Channel-10 program change receive

....................................................... 90

Channel-10 receive ........................ 90

cho (Chorus) .................................. 83

ChoPan .................................... 36, 50

ChoReturn ............................... 36, 49

Chorus ..................................... 36, 83

Chorus pan .................................... 50

Chorus return ................................. 49

Chorus send level ........ 48, 59, 68, 78

Chorus to reverb ............................ 50

Chorus type ............................. 38, 49

ChorusSend ............................. 36, 48

ChoSend (Chorus send level)

........................................... 59, 68, 78

ChoToRev ................................36, 50

Clear All Patterns ...........................79

Clear Pattern ..................................79

Click button .................................8, 86

Click-track beat volumes ................84

Click-track master volume ..............84

Click-track output ............................84

Click-track voice .............................84

ClkOutSel .......................................84

Clock out ........................................91

Close position .................................89

ClosePosi .......................................89

Connector .........................................9

Control change number ............65, 68

Control change value .........65, 68, 88

Control-change send channel ........88

Copy Pad ........................................53

Copy Pattern ..................................80

Cord clip .....................................9, 10

Crosstalk ......................................102

Crosstalk level ......................102, 103

Crosstalk source ...........................103

Cubase Remote Control .................15

DC IN terminal ............................9, 10

Decay time .....................................58

Delete .......................................73, 97

Device number ...............................92

Display ..............................................8

Drum .........................................30, 31

Edit Buffer .......................................42

Effect ..............................................36

Effect parameter .................48, 49, 50

Exchange Kits ................................54

Exchange Pads ..............................53

Exchange Patterns .........................80

External MIDI switch .......................66

F (Frequency) .................................87

FACTORY SET ..............................98

Fc (Filter cutoff frequency) .............58

File ............................................43, 92

Filter cutoff frequency (Fc) .............58

FOOT SW .......................................29

FOOT SW jack .................................9

Foot switch .................................9, 29

Foot switch input selection .............89

FootSwInsel ....................................89

Format ............................................ 97

Frequency ...................................... 87

Frequency band ............................. 87

Func (Pad function) ........................ 88

Function ......................................... 29

G (Gain) ......................................... 87

Gain ....................................... 87, 101

GAIN knob ....................................... 9

Gate time ....................................... 64

Headphones ............................... 9, 10

HH Func ......................................... 52

HH MIDI ch .................................... 52

HHMIDIType .................................. 52

HI-HAT CONTROL jack ................... 9

Hi-hat controller ................................ 9

Hi-hat function ................................ 52

Hi-hat MIDI channel ....................... 52

Hi-hat MIDI type ............................. 52

Import ................................... 8, 25, 72

Import SMF .................................... 80

Initialize Kit ..................................... 54

Initialize Pad ................................... 54

Input level indicator ...................... 100

Instrument Reset ............................ 98

Jack .................................................. 9

KIT ................................................. 46

Kit ................................................... 32

Kit category .................................... 47

Kit name ......................................... 47

Kit number ...................................... 47

Kit Volume ...................................... 47

Layer .............................................. 32

Layer Switch .................................. 51

Level ............................................ 101

Load ......................................... 42, 94

Local Control ............................ 13, 90

LocalCtrl ......................................... 90

Loop ............................................... 75

Index

112 Owner’s Manual

M.Tune ...........................................83

Master EQ ......................................36

Master EQ bypass ..........................87

Master tune ....................................83

Master volume ............................8, 83

Memory .....................................42, 43

Memory Info .......................73, 81, 98

Memory usage ratio ............73, 81, 98

MEQBypass ...................................87

Merge .............................................92

Merge Pattern .................................79

Message type .................................62

MIDI ..........................................12, 61

MIDI Ch (MIDI channel) ......63, 65, 66

MIDI channel (MIDI Ch) ......63, 65, 66

MIDI IN ...........................................85

MIDI IN/OUT ...................................91

MIDI IN/OUT connectors ............9, 12

MIDI merge .....................................92

MIDI OUT .......................................85

MIDI Switch ....................................66

MIDI synchronization ......................91

MIDI Thru port ................................91

MIDISync ........................................91

Mode ..............................................62

Mono/Poly ......................................60

Mute switch ....................................51

MuteSw ..........................................51

Normalize .......................................73

Note ..........................................57, 63

Noteq ..............................................85

NoteAcc ..........................................85

Optimize .........................................73

OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks ........9

Pad ...............................100, 102, 103

Pad function ...................................88

Pad indicator ....................................8

PAD jacks .............................9, 28, 30

Pad names .......................16, 28, 100

Pad to be copied ............................53

Pad to be replaced .........................53

Pad type .......................................101

Pad(s) to copy ..............................104

Pad(s) to replace ..........................104

Pad10-12 ........................................89

Pan ...........................................57, 77

Pan depth .......................................84

Panel Lock ........................................8

Parameter Setting Areas ................ 44

PATTERN ...................................... 74

Pattern ........................................... 31

Pattern category ............................. 75

Pattern name ........................... 75, 76

Pattern number .............................. 75

Pattern playback mode .................. 56

Pattern to be copied ....................... 80

PC (Program change) ........ 66, 67, 77

PHONES jack ............................. 9, 10

Playback mode .............................. 70

Playing mode ................................. 62

PlayMode ....................................... 70

Point ............................................... 71

PolyAfter ......................................... 90

Polyphonic aftertouch status .......... 90

Power adaptor ........................ 6, 9, 10

Power supply .................................. 10

Preset kit ............................ 17, 32, 47

Preset pattern .................... 20, 31, 56

Preset voice ....................... 18, 31, 56

Program change ................ 66, 67, 77

Program change receive ................ 90

Q (Bandwidth) ................................ 87

Q (Resonance) ............................... 59

Quantize ......................................... 78

Quarter-note note number (Noteq) 85

Ratio ............................................... 73

Rcv10ch ......................................... 90

RcvKeyOff ...................................... 64

RcvPC ............................................ 90

RcvPC10ch .................................... 90

REC ................................................ 21

Receive key-off .............................. 64

Recording ........................... 13, 21, 43

Reject time ................................... 102

Release time .................................. 58

Rename .......................................... 96

Resonance (Q) ............................... 59

rev (Reverb) ................................... 83

Reverb ...................................... 36, 83

Reverb pan .................................... 50

Reverb return ................................. 50

Reverb send level ........ 48, 59, 68, 78

Reverb type .................................... 50

ReverbSend ............................. 36, 48

RevPan .................................... 36, 50

RevReturn ................................ 36, 50

RevSend (Reverb send level)

........................................... 59, 68, 78

Save ..........................................42, 93

Send hi-hat controller ......................89

SendHH ..........................................89

SeqCtrl ............................................91

Sequencer control ...........................91

Shape .............................................87

SMF file name .................................80

Splash sensitivity ............................89

SplashSens ....................................89

Standby/On switch ................9, 10, 11

Startup pattern ................................83

Startup trigger .................................83

StartupKit ........................................83

StartupPtn .......................................83

StartupTrg .......................................83

Store ...............................................45

Tap tempo .......................8, 29, 86, 88

Tempo .......................................47, 75

Terminal ............................................9

TGSwitch ........................................66

ThruPort ..........................................91

Time signature ..........................21, 75

Tone generator switch ....................66

Total memory ......................73, 81, 98

Transmit ....................................67, 76

Transpose .......................................57

TrgAltGrp (Trigger alternate group) 65

TrgMonoPoly ..................................65

TrgSetupLink ..................................52

TrgVel .............................................64

TRIGGER .......................................99

Trigger alternate group ...................65

Trigger mono/poly ...........................65

Trigger setup category ..................100

Trigger setup link ............................52

Trigger setup name .......................100

Trigger setup number ...................100

Trigger velocity ...............................64

Trim point ........................................71

Trimming .........................................71

Tune ................................................57

Tuning .............................................57

Turn off all sound ..............................8

USB memory device .................11, 23

USB TO DEVICE port .................9, 11

USB TO HOST port ..............9, 12, 13

Used memory .....................73, 81, 98

User kit ..........................17, 22, 32, 42

User pattern ........................21, 31, 42

User trigger .......................30, 42, 100

UTILITY ..........................................82

Index

Owner’s Manual 113

Appendix

Val (Control change value) ...... 65, 68

Var (Variation send level) .. 59, 68, 77

var (Variation) ................................ 83

Variation ................................... 36, 83

Variation category .......................... 48

Variation pan .................................. 49

Variation return .............................. 49

Variation send level ........... 59, 68, 77

Variation to chorus ......................... 49

Variation to reverb ......................... 49

Variation type ................................. 48

VarPan ..................................... 36, 49

VarReturn ................................ 36, 49

VarToCho ................................ 36, 49

VarToRev ................................. 36, 49

VelCurve ...................................... 101

Velocity ........................................ 102

Velocity curve .............................. 101

Velocity Limits ................................ 64

Velocity lower limit ......................... 64

Velocity upper limit ......................... 64

VOICE ............................................ 55

Voice .............................................. 31

Voice category ............................... 56

Voice Layer .................................... 32

Voice name .................................... 56

Voice number ................................. 56

Voice Volume ................................. 57

Volume (Click-track) ...................... 84

Volume (kit) .................................... 47

Volume (MIDI) ................................ 77

Volume (Voice) .............................. 57

VOLUME dial ................................... 8

VOLUME knob (headphones) .......... 9

WAVE ............................................ 69

Wave ........................................ 25, 31

Wave name .............................. 70, 71

Wave number ................................ 70

114

Owner’s Manual

MEMO

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panam

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2432

SY54

Ya maha Electronic Drums web site:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/drums/ed

Ya maha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WR85360

907PO???.?-01A0

Printed in China